CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this man

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this man"

Transcription

1 LK DVD AUDIO/VIDEO SA-CD PLAYER DVD-S1800 STANDBY ON HDMI AUDIO DIRECT

2 CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING THIS UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this unit in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, or cold. In a cabinet, allow about 2.5 cm (1 inch) of free space all around this unit for adequate ventilation. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, nor locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e., a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit in a location where foreign objects may fall onto this unit or where this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. Burning objects (i.e., candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall, spilling the liquid and causing an electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use excessive force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Use only the voltage specified on this unit. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than as specified. 13 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reason. 14 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e., vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 15 Be sure to read the TROUBLESHOOTING section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 16 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set the unit in standby mode, then disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 17 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 18 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like. The unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. LASER SAFETY This unit employs a laser. Due to possible eye injury, only a qualified service person should remove the cover or attempt to service this device. DANGER This unit emits visible laser radiation when open. Avoid direct eye exposure to beam. When this unit is plugged into a wall outlet, do not place your eyes close to the opening of the disc tray and other openings or look inside. LASER Type Wave length Output Power Beam divergence CAUTION-VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS. Semiconductor laser GaAlAs 650 nm (DVD) 790 nm (VCD/CD) 1.45 mw (DVD) 1.13 mw (VCD/CD) 60 degrees i En

3 INTRODUCTION 3 Playable disc formats... 3 DVD region codes... 3 Patent information... 4 Cleaning discs... 4 Supplied accessories... 4 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW 5 Front panel... 5 Front panel display... 6 Rear panel... 7 Remote control... 8 CONNECTIONS 10 General notes on connections Audio connections Connecting a stereo amplifier Connecting an AV receiver with 6ch/ multi-channel input Video connections HDMI connection Connecting the power cable GETTING STARTED 15 Step 1: Inserting batteries into the remote control Using the remote control Step 2: Turning on the power Step 3: Setting a TV type Step 4: Setting a language preference Setting the OSD (On-Screen Display) language Setting the audio, subtitle and disc menu languages CONTENTS DISC OPERATION 18 Basic operation Pausing playback Selecting a track/chapter Searching backward/forward Repeat playback Repeating playback Repeating a section (except DVD-Audio/MP3/WMA/JPEG) Random playback (except DVD/SA-CD) Program playback (CD) Disc menu operation (DVD/VCD/SVCD) Using the DVD menu Using the Video CD playback control (PBC) menu (VCD/SVCD) On-screen display (OSD) menu (DVD/VCD/SVCD/SA-CD) Using the OSD menu (DVD/VCD/SVCD/CD) Displaying text information (SA-CD) Picture Setting menu (DVD/VCD/SVCD) Adjusting picture settings Zooming pictures (DVD-Video/VCD/SVCD/DivX /JPEG) Viewing angles (DVD-Video) Audio and Subtitle languages (DVD-Video/VCD) Selecting an audio language Selecting a subtitle language (DVD-Video) DivX external subtitle files Changing pages (DVD-Audio) Group/File selection (DVD-Audio/DivX / MP3/WMA/Kodak picture CD) Selecting a group (DVD-Audio) Selecting a file in a folder (DivX /MP3/WMA/Kodak picture CD) Bonus group playback (DVD-Audio) Changing the playback area and layer (SA-CD) Multimedia file playback (MP3/WMA/DivX /JPEG) Displaying the thumbnail screen (JPEG) Rotating pictures (JPEG) English Continued 1 En

4 CONTENTS SETUP MENU 27 LANGUAGE CODE LIST 39 Menu overview Setup menu operation General setup menu Selecting DVD-Audio mode Selecting SA-CD mode Setting the OSD language Restricting playback with parental control Changing the parental password Setting the screen saver Setting the auto power function Setting the sleep timer Resetting the system Displaying the DivX VOD registration code Audio setup menu Setting the analog output Setting the digital output Setting the LPCM output Setting the night listening mode Speaker setup menu Setting speaker sizes Setting speaker distances Setting speaker levels Setting the SA-CD configuration Video setup menu Setting the TV display Setting the TV type Selecting the wide screen format Selecting the black level (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Selecting the closed caption (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Setting the still mode Selecting the scan function Switching the SCART video out (U.K., Europe, and Russia models only) HDMI setup menu Setting the HDMI video Selecting the DVI output range Setting the HDMI audio DISC setup menu Selecting the default audio/subtitle/ DVD menu language Selecting an angle mark display Selecting the PBC (playback control) function Setting the duration for a slide show TROUBLESHOOTING 40 GLOSSARY 42 SPECIFICATIONS 44 2 En

5 INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing this unit. This Owner s Manual explains the basic operation of this unit. Illustrations in this manual are based on the U.K., Europe, and Russia models unless otherwise specified. Notes contain important information about safety and operating instructions. y indicates a tip for your operation. This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and the product, the product has priority. Playable disc formats This unit is designed for use with the following discs: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD+R DL, Video CD, Super Video CD, Super Audio CD (SA-CD), Audio CD, CD-R and CD-RW. INTRODUCTION Notes CD-R(W), DVD-R(W) and DVD+R(W) cannot be played unless finalized. Copyright-protected WMA files cannot be played with this unit. This unit supports JPEG files of 2848 x 2136 pixels in size. Some discs cannot be played depending on the recording conditions, such as the PC environment and application software. The characteristics and condition of some discs; materials, scratches, curvature, etc., may result in playback failure. Be sure to use only CD-R(W), DVD-R(W) and DVD+R(W) discs made by reliable manufacturers. Do not use any non-standard shaped discs (heart-shaped, etc.). Do not use discs with tape, seals, or paste on their surface. Doing so may damage this unit. Do not use discs affixed with labels printed by a commercially available label printer. DVD region codes This unit is designed to support the region management system. Check the regional code number on the DVD disc package. If the number does not match the region code of this unit (see the table below or the back of this unit), this unit may be unable to play the disc. English Destination Region code of this unit Playable discs U.S.A. Canada 1 1 ALL This unit can play: MP3, WMA (except copyright-protected WMA) and picture (Kodak, JPEG) files recorded on CD-R(W)/ DVD-R(W)/DVD+R(W) JPEG/ISO 9660 format Maximum 14 character display DivX disc on CD-R(W)/DVD-R(W)/DVD+R(W) Official DivX Certified product Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX 6) with standard playback of DivX media files U.K. Europe Asia Korea Russia 2 2 ALL 3 3 ALL 5 5 ALL 3 En

6 INTRODUCTION Patent information Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-d symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Cleaning discs When a disc becomes dirty, clean it with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the disc from the center out. Do not wipe in a circular motion. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners, or antistatic spray intended for analog records. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc. DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. Supplied accessories Check your package to make sure it contains the following items: Remote control Batteries (x2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) DCDi is a trademark of Faroudja, a division of Genesis Microchip, Inc. POWER DIMMER HDMI AUDIO DIRECT STANDBY GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC. CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH PROG RANDOM REPEAT A B Audio pin cable This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. STOP PLAY PAUSE SKIP TOP MENU ON SCREEN MENU RETURN SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM Video pin cable Power cable 4 En

7 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW Front panel FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW English 1 STANDBY ON HDMI AUDIO DIRECT Disc tray Load a disc in the disc tray. 6 Opens or closes the disc tray. 2 STANDBY/ON Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. 3 HDMI indicator Lights up green when an HDMI component is recognized by this unit and the HDMI mode is set to on. Lights up orange when no HDMI component is recognized by this unit while the HDMI mode is set to on. 4 AUDIO DIRECT indicator Lights up when you select the AUDIO DIRECT mode by pressing AUDIO DIRECT on the remote control. 7 b/w Searches backward.* Moves to the previous chapter or track. 8 f/a Searches forward.* Moves to the next chapter or track. 9 p/e Starts or pauses playback. 0 s Stops playback. 5 Front panel display Displays playback information or settings. * Press and hold the button for about two seconds. 5 En

8 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW Front panel display SVCD WMA MP3 JPEG DVD AUDIO SA-CD DivX P.SCAN TITLE GROUP CHP/ TRK D MULTI D.MIX PROG. RANDOM ALL A B P.SCAN indicator Lights up when the progressive scan function is activated. 2 Playback mode indicators Display the icon for the selected playback mode. 3 Decoder indicators Display the icon for the selected internal decoder. 4 MULTI indicator Lights up when playing the multi-channel audio source. 5 D.MIX indicator (DVD-Audio only) Lights up when playing the disc that allows down mixing of the multi-channel audio source. 6 Disc indicators Display the icon for the disc type. 7 Information display Displays various information such as a title/chapter/ track number or elapsed playing time. y You can adjust the brightness of the front panel display using DIMMER on the remote control. 6 En

9 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW Rear panel English MAINS PR / CR L C L COAXIAL IN VIDEO AV PB / CB Y R R MIXED 2CH FRONT SUBWOOFER SURROUND OUT ON OFF OPTICAL RS 232C HDMI S VIDEO COMPONENT AUDIO OUT DIGITAL REMOTE CONTROL VIDEO OUT q w (U.K., Europe, and Russia models) 1 AUDIO OUT (6ch discrete) jacks Connect to the 6ch input jacks of your AV receiver. 2 DIGITAL (COAXIAL) jack Connect to the coaxial input jack of your AV receiver. 3 REMOTE CONTROL (IN/OUT) connectors Use in custom installations to transmit remote control signals via cable connections. 4 REMOTE CONTROL (RS-232C) terminal (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe, and Russia models only) Use as an expansion terminal for commercial use. Consult your dealer for details. 5 AV terminal (U.K., Europe, and Russia models only) Connect to SCART input terminal of your TV. 6 VIDEO OUT (VIDEO) jack Connect to the composite video input jack of your AV receiver. 7 MAINS Connect the supplied power cable. 8 AUDIO OUT (MIXED 2CH) jacks Connect to the audio input jacks of your AV receiver or stereo system. 9 DIGITAL (OPTICAL) jack Connect to the optical input jack of your AV receiver. 0 HDMI jack Connect to the HDMI input jack of your HDMI component. q VIDEO OUT (S VIDEO) jack Connect to the S-video input jack of your AV receiver. w VIDEO OUT (COMPONENT) jacks Connect to the component input jacks of your AV receiver. Remote control connectors and RS-232C terminal The REMOTE CONTROL (IN/OUT) connectors and the REMOTE CONTROL (RS-232C) terminal are used in custom installation. Keep the RS-232C switch set to OFF and do not connect any cables to these connectors during normal use. Caution: Do not touch the inner pins of the jacks on the rear panel of this unit. Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to this unit. 7 En

10 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW Remote control 1 DIMMER Selects from three different levels of brightness for the front panel display: bright, dim and auto. For auto setting, brightness is automatically set to low only during playback. POWER DIMMER GROUP CLEAR SETUP STOP HDMI AUDIO DIRECT STANDBY PAGE MULTI 2CH PROG RANDOM REPEAT A B SLOW SEARCH PLAY PAUSE y u i o p a s d f g h 2 HDMI Switches between the HDMI resolution settings or turns off the HDMI mode (see page 36). y You can select the HDMI resolution by pressing HDMI on the remote control repeatedly or by using the HDMI Video setup menu. If you press HDMI on the remote control once, the currently selected resolution setting is displayed in the top left corner of the display and in the front panel display. 3 GROUP Selects the DVD-Audio group (see page 25). 0 q TOP MENU SKIP ON SCREEN j 4 PAGE (+/ ) Selects the DVD-Audio still picture (see page 24). w e MENU RETURN k 5 Numeric buttons (0-9) Select numbered items in the currently displayed menu. r t SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM l ; 6 CLEAR Clear the mode or setting (see page 20). 7 SETUP Accesses or exits from the setup menu of this unit (see page 28). 8 STOP ( 7 ) Stops playback (see page 18). 9 PAUSE ( 8 ) Pauses playback temporarily (see page 18). Frame-by-frame playback (see page 18). 0 SKIP (l22 / 33l) Moves to the previous/next chapter or track. q TOP MENU Displays the top-level disc menu. y The title menu is displayed for discs with the title menu. 8 En

11 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW w Cursors ( / / / ) Selects an item in the currently displayed menu. Confirms the menu selection. e MENU Accesses the menu of a disc (see page 20). r SUBTITLE Selects the subtitle language (see page 24). t AUDIO Selects the audio language or format (see page 24). y POWER ( l ) Turns on this unit (see page 15). d A-B Repeats a specific segment (see page 19). f Confirms the menu selection. g SLOW / SEARCH (22 / 33) Searches backward or forward (see page 19). h PLAY ( 3) Starts playback (see page 18). j ON SCREEN Accesses or exit from the on-screen display (OSD) menu of this unit (see page 21). Press twice during playback to access the Picture Setting menu (see page 22). English u STANDBY ( ) Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 15). i AUDIO DIRECT Turns off the video output during audio disc playback in order to improve audio quality. Press again to turn on the video output. This function is not available when an HDMI component is recognized by this unit. In the AUDIO DIRECT mode, the front panel display goes out. Once this unit is turned off, the AUDIO DIRECT mode is cleared (only when an SA-CD disc is played back, the mode is cleared if the disc tray is opened/closed). o MULTI / 2CH Selects a sound mode: Stereo or Multi-channel. Changes the SA-CD playback area (see page 25). k RETURN Returns to the previous setup menu. l ZOOM Enlarges the video image (see page 23). ; ANGLE Selects the DVD camera angle (see page 23). y Two buttons (w and f) act in the same way. p PROG Accesses the program setup menu to program disc tracks or exit from its menu (see page 20). a RANDOM Plays tracks in random order (see page 19). s REPEAT Repeats the chapter, track, title, group or disc (see page 19). 9 En

12 CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS General notes on connections Be sure to turn off this unit and unplug the power supply cable, before you make or change connections. Depending on the component you want to connect, there are various ways to make connections. Possible connections are described below. Refer to the manuals supplied with your other components as necessary to make the best connections. Do not connect this unit via your VCR. The video quality could be distorted by the copy protection system. Do not connect the audio out jack of this unit to the phono in jack of your audio system. Connecting an AV receiver with 6ch/ multi-channel input Analog connections If you want to reproduce multi-channel Super Audio CD (SA-CD) and DVD-Audio, connect AUDIO OUT (6ch discrete) jacks of this unit to the corresponding input jacks of your AV receiver using commercially available audio pin cables. Audio connections This unit has digital coaxial, digital optical, analog 6ch discrete, and analog mixed 2ch output jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your component. C COAXIAL L L R R MIXED 2CH FRONT SUBWOOFER SURROUND OPTICAL AUDIO OUT DIGITAL IN OUT ON OFF RS 232C REMOTE CONTROL AV HDMI This unit (U.K., Europe, and Russia models) Connecting a stereo amplifier Connect AUDIO OUT (MIXED 2CH) jacks of this unit to the corresponding input jacks of your audio component (such as a stereo amplifier) using the supplied audio pin cable. You can connect a subwoofer to the SUBWOOFER jack. FRONT R L C SUBWOOFER SURROUND R L AV receiver This unit (U.K., Europe, and Russia models) Speakers L C L COAXIAL IN AV R R MIXED 2CH FRONT SUBWOOFER SURROUND OPTICAL AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT ON OFF RS 232C REMOTE CONTROL HDMI Audio pin cable (supplied) Stereo amplifier CD / DVD R L Left speaker Right speaker Subwoofer 10 En

13 CONNECTIONS Digital connections If you want to use the Dolby Digital, DTS, or MPEG function on your AV receiver, connect DIGITAL (OPTICAL) <A> or DIGITAL (COAXIAL) <B> jack of this unit to the corresponding input jacks of your AV receiver using a commercially available digital optical or digital coaxial cable. Video connections This unit has SCART, composite video, S-video, and component video output jacks. If your AV receiver has video output jacks, connect your receiver and then your TV so that you can use one TV for several different video sources (LD, VCR, etc.) by simply switching the input source selector on your receiver. Use the one that corresponds to the input jacks on the component to be connected. English L C L COAXIAL IN AV This unit (U.K., Europe, and Russia models) R R MIXED 2CH FRONT SUBWOOFER SURROUND OPTICAL AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT ON OFF RS 232C REMOTE CONTROL HDMI VIDEO PR / CR This unit (U.K., Europe, and Russia models) RS 232C ONTROL AV HDMI PB / CB Y S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OPTICAL IN <A> COAXIAL IN <B> Video pin cable (supplied) AV receiver <A> <B> <C> <D> Speakers VIDEO IN S-VIDEO IN PB/CB PR/CR Y COMPONENT VIDEO IN AV receiver VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Notes VIDEO IN S VIDEO IN COMPONENT VIDEO IN If you make a connection with <A> or <B>, set [Digital Out] to [All] (see Setting the digital output on page 31). If the audio format of the digital output does not match the capabilities of your receiver, the receiver produces a distorted sound or no sound at all. Make sure to select the appropriate audio format from the menu screen on the disc. Pressing AUDIO on the remote control once or more may change not only the audio languages but also the audio format. SA-CD audio signals are not output from DIGITAL (COAXIAL/OPTICAL) jacks. If you want to enjoy Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG formats, you must connect this unit to an AV receiver that supports these formats. TV 11 En

14 CONNECTIONS Composite video jack <A> Connect VIDEO OUT (VIDEO) jack of this unit to the video input jack of your AV receiver, and then to that of your TV using the supplied video pin cable. S-video jack <B> S-video connections achieve a clearer picture than composite video connections by transmitting video signals on separate wires for luminance (Y) and chrominance (C). Connect VIDEO OUT (S VIDEO) jack of this unit to S-video input jack of your AV receiver, and then to that of your TV using a commercially available S-video cable. Component video jacks <C> Component video connections achieve higher fidelity color reproduction than S-video connections by transmitting video signals on separate wires for luminance (Y: green) and chrominance (PB: blue, PR: red). Connect VIDEO OUT (COMPONENT) jacks of this unit to the component input jacks of your AV receiver, and then to those of your TV using a commercially available component cable. Observe the color of each jack when you make connections. If your receiver does not have component output jacks, you can achieve a better video image by connecting the component output jacks of this unit directly to the component input jacks of your TV. SCART terminal <D> (U.K., Europe, and Russia models only) If your TV has only a terminal for video input, you can connect the TV directly to this unit. Connect AV terminal of this unit to SCART input terminal of your TV using a commercially available SCART cable. Notes Ensure that the TV indication on SCART cable is connected to the TV set and DVD indication on SCART cable is connected to this unit. S-video signal is not output at AV terminal. See page 36 for SCART video setting. HDMI connection HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) provides high quality digital audio and video on a single connection. Connect the HDMI jack of this unit to an HDMI input jack of your AV receiver, and then to that of your TV using a commercially available HDMI cable. If your receiver does not have an HDMI input jack, you can achieve a better video image by connecting the HDMI jack of this unit directly to the HDMI input jack of your TV. L R MIXED 2CH Notes C FRONT SUBWOOFER AUDIO OUT R SURROUND COAXIAL OPTICAL DIGITAL This unit (U.K., Europe, and Russia models) L IN AV receiver Speakers OUT ON OFF RS 232C REMOTE CONTROL You need to make appropriate audio connections if the connected component does not input audio signals (see page 10). This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. You need a commercially available HDMI/DVI conversion cable when you connect this unit to other DVI components. In this case, you need to use another audio connection to this connection because the HDMI jack of this unit does not output any audio signals. Do not disconnect or turn off the power of the HDMI/DVI component connected to the HDMI jack of this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. y When connecting an HDMI component, refer to the manual supplied with your component. AV HDMI IN HDMI OUT HDMI IN TV HDMI 12 En

15 CONNECTIONS HDMI video output This unit is compatible with the following video formats: 480p/60 Hz, 576p/50 Hz, 720p/50 Hz, 60 Hz, 1080i/50 Hz, 60 Hz, and 1080p/50 Hz, 60 Hz. Notes You need to select one of the HDMI resolution settings by pressing HDMI on the remote control repeatedly or by using the HDMI Video setup menu (see page 36). Depending on the connected DVI component, black and white in the image may not be distinct. In this case, adjust the picture setting of the connected DVI component. English HDMI audio output Audio format Analog output HDMI Audio setting Auto* 1 PCM Off Dolby Digital Multi-channel PCM multi* 2 Dolby Digital Stereo PCM 2ch Multi-channel PCM multi* 2 DTS DTS DVD-Video Stereo PCM 2ch MPEG Multi-channel PCM multi* 2 MPEG Stereo PCM 2ch PCM 2ch* 4 Multi-channel/Stereo PCM 2ch PCM 2ch Multi-channel PCM (PPCM) multi* 2,3 PCM (PPCM) multi* 2,3 Multi DVD-Audio Stereo PCM (PPCM) 2ch* 3 PCM (PPCM) 2ch* 3 2ch* 4 Multi-channel/Stereo PCM (PPCM) 2ch PCM (PPCM) 2ch Off CD/MP3/ WMA/DivX 2ch Multi-channel/Stereo PCM 2ch PCM 2ch Multi-channel PCM multi* 2 Multi DTS-CD Stereo DTS PCM 2ch 2ch Multi-channel/Stereo PCM 2ch VCD 2ch Multi-channel/Stereo PCM 2ch PCM 2ch Multi-channel PCM multi* 2 Multi SVCD Stereo MPEG PCM 2ch 2ch Multi-channel/Stereo PCM 2ch SA-CD Multi/2ch Multi-channel/Stereo *1: If the connected HDMI component does not support bitstream signals (Dolby Digital, DTS, and MPEG), the audio output is automatically changed from bitstream signals to PCM signals. *2: If the HDMI component does not support multi-channel audio signals, the audio output is automatically changed from PCM multi-channel signals to PCM stereo signals and 48 khz/16 bits signals or less. *3: If the audio source is prohibited from downmixing, the front L/R channel audio and 48 khz/16-bit signals or less are output instead of downmixed stereo. *4: If the connected component does not support more than 48 khz, the audio output is automatically changed to 48 khz/ 16-bit signals or less. Notes You need to set HDMI Audio (see page 37). SA-CD signals cannot be output using HDMI. Make an analog connection to listen to SA-CD (see page 10). 13 En

16 CONNECTIONS Connecting the power cable After all other connections are complete, plug the supplied power cable into MAINS of this unit and then plug the power cable to an AC outlet. To an AC outlet MAINS 14 En

17 GETTING STARTED y If the settings you have made are inappropriate, you can always reset all options and your personal settings to the initial factory settings. For details, see Resetting the system on page 30. Step 1: Inserting batteries into the remote control GETTING STARTED Using the remote control Use the remote control within 6 m (20 ft approx.) of this unit and point it toward the remote control sensor. English within 6m (20 ft approx.) 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4), following the indications (+/ ) on the inside of the compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. Notes Insert batteries correctly according to the polarity markings (+/ ). The batteries inserted in the opposite direction may leak. Replace the exhausted batteries immediately with new ones to prevent a leakage. Remove the batteries from the compartment if the remote control is not used for more than a month. If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. Do not use old batteries together with new ones. Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. Dispose of the batteries correctly in accordance with your local regulations. Notes Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. Do not drop the remote control. Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: places of high humidity, such as near a bath places of high temperature, such as near a heater or stove places of extremely low temperature dusty places Step 2: Turning on the power 1 Make sure that the power cable is connected to an AC outlet. 2 Turn on your TV and AV receiver. 3 Select the appropriate input source of the AV receiver connected to this unit. Refer to the manual supplied with your AV receiver for details. 4 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel or POWER ( l ) on the remote control to turn on this unit. The front panel display lights up. 5 Set the TV to the correct Video IN channel (e.g., EXT1/2, AV1/2, AUDIO/VIDEO, etc. Refer to the manual supplied with your TV for details). The default screen appears on the TV. 15 En

18 GETTING STARTED Step 3: Setting a TV type This unit is compatible with both NTSC and PAL video formats. Select the color system that matches your TV. y Press RETURN to display the previous menu. Press SETUP to exit from the setup menu. 1 Press SETUP. The setup menu appears. SETUP GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER VIDEO HDMI DISC Move : DVD-Audio mode SA-CD mode OSD Language Parental Rating Parental Password Screen Saver Auto Power Off Sleep Timer Return 1/2 Select : Enter 2 Press / repeatedly to select [VIDEO], and then press. [VIDEO] menu appears. VIDEO TV Display TV Type Wide Screen Format Black Level*1 Closed Caption*1 Still Mode Component Scart Video Out*2 Move : Return 16:9 PAL Off Off Off Field Interlaced RGB 1/1 Select : Enter *1: [Black Level] and [Closed Caption] are only for U.S.A. and Canada models. *2: [Scart Video Out] is only for U.K., Europe, and Russia models. 3 Press / repeatedly to highlight [TV Type]. 4 Press / to select one of the options below. PAL Select this if the connected TV is a PAL system TV. It will change video signals of NTSC discs and output them in PAL format. NTSC Select this if the connected TV is an NTSC system TV. It will change video signals of PAL discs and output them in NTSC format. MULTI Select this if the connected TV is compatible with both NTSC and PAL formats (such as a multi-system TV). The output format will be in accordance with the video signals of the disc. Notes VIDEO TV Display TV Type Wide Screen Format Black Level*1 Closed Caption*1 Still Mode Component Scart Video Out*2 Move : Return 16:9 PAL Off Off Off Field Interlaced RGB Before changing the current TV Standard setting, ensure that your TV supports the selected TV type system. If you play an NTSC-formatted disc with the [PAL] setting or a PAL-formatted disc with the [NTSC] setting, the video quality may deteriorate. When [TV Type] is set to [MULTI], this unit may change the HDMI resolution unwantedly. In this case, try the [NTSC] or [PAL] setting. 1/1 Select : Enter 16 En

19 GETTING STARTED Step 4: Setting a language preference You can select your own preferred language settings. This unit will automatically switch to your preferred language for you whenever you load a disc. If the language selected is not available on the disc, the default language of the disc will be used instead. The OSD (On-Screen Display) language in the system menu will remain once selected. y Press RETURN to display the previous menu. Press SETUP to exit from the setup menu. Setting the OSD (On-Screen Display) language 1 Press SETUP. The setup menu appears. 2 Press / repeatedly to highlight [GENERAL], and then press. [GENERAL] menu appears. GENERAL DVD-Audio mode SA-CD mode OSD Language Parental Rating Parental Password Screen Saver Auto Power Off Sleep Timer Move : Return DVD-Audio SA-CD English Level On Mode 1 Off 1/2 Select : Enter 3 Press / repeatedly to highlight [OSD Language]. 4 Press / to select a language. Setting the audio, subtitle and disc menu languages 1 Press SETUP. The setup menu appears. 2 Press / repeatedly to highlight [DISC], and then press. [DISC] menu appears. DISC AUDIO Language Subtitle Language DVD Menu Language Angle Mark PBC Time Interval Move : Return English Off English On Off 3 sec 3 Press / repeatedly to highlight [AUDIO Language] or [Subtitle Language] or [DVD Menu Language]. 4 Press / to select a language. To select the language not in the list: 1 Select [Others] under [AUDIO Language] or [Subtitle Language] or [DVD Menu Language]. 2 Press. 3 Use the numeric buttons (0-9) to enter the 4-digit language code (see LANGUAGE CODE LIST on page 39). 4 Press. 1/1 Select : Enter English 17 En

20 DISC OPERATION DISC OPERATION Notes Unless otherwise specified, all operations described here are carried out using the supplied remote control. If the inhibition icon ( or Prohibit ) appears on the TV screen when you press a button, the function for that button is not available on the current disc or at the current time. Depending on the DVD or Video CD disc, some operations may operate differently or be restricted. Do not push on the disc tray or put any objects other than discs on the disc tray. Doing so may cause the disc unit to malfunction. Basic operation GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH PROG 3 Press again to close the disc tray. After recognizing the disc, this unit starts to play back automatically. If you press PLAY ( 3) when the disc tray is opened, the disc tray closes and playback starts automatically. Depending on the disc, the disc reading time may exceed 30 seconds due to the complexity of the directory/file configuration. 4 To stop playback, press STOP ( 7 ). RESUME appears in the front panel display. 5 To resume playback, press PLAY ( 3). The disc is played back from the last stopping point. y As long as you do not eject a disc, you can resume playback even if you turn off this unit. Numeric buttons (0-9) RANDOM REPEAT 6 To cancel resume mode, press STOP ( 7 ) twice. STOP ( ) PAUSE ( ) SKIP ( / ) CLEAR SETUP STOP SLOW SEARCH PAUSE SKIP A B PLAY SLOW/SEARCH ( / ) PLAY ( ) Notes It may not be possible to play certain MP3/JPEG/DivX discs due to the configuration and characteristics of the disc or the recording conditions. When you play a down mix prohibited disc, NO DOWN MIX lights in the front panel display. TOP MENU ON SCREEN 1 Press on the front panel to open the disc tray. 2 Place a disc in the disc tray with the printed side up. Pausing playback 1 During playback, press PAUSE ( 8 ). Playback is paused and the sound is muted. 2 Press PAUSE ( 8 ) again to select the next picture frame (frame-by-frame playback). 3 To resume normal playback, press PLAY ( 3). Selecting a track/chapter Press SKIP (l22 / 33l) or use the numeric buttons (0-9) and to select a track/ chapter number. You can move to the top of the currently playing track/chapter by pressing SKIP (l22 ) once, and move to the previous track/chapter by pressing SKIP (l22 ) twice. During repeat playback of a track/chapter, press SKIP (l22 / 33l) to replay the same track/ chapter. 18 En

21 DISC OPERATION Searching backward/forward 1 Press SLOW / SEARCH (22 / 33). For slow search, press PAUSE ( 8 ) to pause playback before pressing SLOW / SEARCH (22 / 33). 2 While searching, press SLOW / SEARCH (22 / 33) repeatedly to select the desired speed. 3 To resume normal playback, press PLAY ( 3). Notes For WMA, DTS-CD and JPEG, the search function (backward, forward and slow playback) is not available. For MP3, slow playback is not available. For VCD, SVCD and DivX, the slow backward function is not available. MP3, WMA, JPEG, DivX Chapter: repeats the current chapter Title: repeats the current title Track: repeats the current track Group: repeats the current group Folder: repeats the current folder All*: repeats the entire disc OFF: exits from repeat mode *: This feature may not be available with some discs. Note OFF Track Folder For VCD and SVCD, repeat playback is not available when the PBC mode is selected. All English Repeat playback You can repeat single chapter/track, single title/group or entire disc. Also, you can set two points (start and end points) to repeat the specified section. Repeating playback Press REPEAT to select the repeat play mode. Each time you press the button, the display on the TV screen changes as follows: DVD-Video CLEAR SETUP Chapter SLOW SEARCH REPEAT A B Title REPEAT A-B Repeating a section (except DVD-Audio/MP3/WMA/JPEG) 1 During playback, press A-B at the desired starting point. 2 Press A-B again at the desired end point. The selected section repeats continuously. 3 To exit from the sequence, press A-B. Random playback (except DVD/SA-CD) You can play tracks in random order. PROG RANDOM REPEAT RANDOM DVD-Audio Track OFF OFF Group 1 During playback, press RANDOM. RANDOM appears in the front panel display and all tracks are played in random order. 2 To resume normal playback, press RANDOM again. CD, SA-CD, VCD, SVCD Track All OFF 19 En

22 DISC OPERATION Program playback (CD) You can customize the playback order for tracks stored in the disc. This unit supports a maximum of 20 programmed tracks. Numeric buttons (0-9) GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH PROG RANDOM REPEAT PROG Disc menu operation (DVD/VCD/SVCD) Many DVD, Video CD (version 2.0 only), and SVCD discs include original navigational menus called DVD menus and Video CD playback control menus. These menus provide a convenient way to operate the disc. GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH PROG CLEAR CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH A B Numeric buttons (0-9) RANDOM REPEAT STOP ( ) STOP PAUSE PLAY CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH A B SKIP STOP PAUSE PLAY TOP MENU ON SCREEN / / / 1 Press STOP ( 7 ) to stop playback if necessary. 2 Press PROG. The program setup menu appears on the TV screen. 3 Use the numeric buttons (0-9) to enter a track number you want to store as a program play. 4 Press to move the cursor to the next field. 5 Repeat step 3-4 until you store all desired tracks. 6 Use / / / to select [Play Program] and then, press to start program playback. To clear the selected track number Press CLEAR. MENU RETURN RETURN MENU Using the DVD menu 1 Press MENU. The DVD menu appears on the TV screen. Depending on the disc, the DVD menu may appear once you load the disc. 2 Use / / / or the numeric buttons (0-9) to select a playback feature or item. 3 Press to start playback. To exit from the menu Press MENU. MENU TOP MENU SKIP ON SCREEN RETURN SKIP ( / ) / / / RETURN To clear the list Use / / / to select [Clear All], and then press. Note Once you take out the disc from the disc tray or turn off this unit, the stored program play content is cleared. 20 En

23 DISC OPERATION Using the Video CD playback control (PBC) menu (VCD/SVCD) 1 Press MENU to turn on the PBC function. The disc menu appears on the TV screen. Depending on the disc, the disc menu may appear once you load the disc. 2 Use SKIP (l22 / 33l) or the numeric buttons (0-9) to select a playback option. 3 During playback, press RETURN to return to the menu screen. To skip the index menu and play back a disc directly from the beginning Press MENU to turn off the PBC function. y You can also use the setup menu to turn on or off the playback control (PBC) function (see Selecting the PBC (playback control) function on page 38). On-screen display (OSD) menu (DVD/VCD/SVCD/SA-CD) The OSD menu shows disc playback information (e.g., the title or chapter number, elapsed playing time or audio/ subtitle language). A number of operations are possible without interrupting disc playback. Using the OSD menu (DVD/VCD/SVCD/CD) During playback, press ON SCREEN. A list of available disc information appears on the TV screen. DVD-Video 0 DVD-Audio 0 DVD VIDEO 00 : 00 : 10 Title 1 / 1 Audio 1 / 1 1 Chapter 1 / 7 Time 00 : 00 : 10 MPEG 5.1 Ch Subtitle 1 / 1 Bitrate Mbps Angle 1 / 1 02 : 15 : VCD/SVCD/CD 2 w DVD AUDIO 00 : 00 : : 15 : 30 Group 1 / 1 Track 1 / 8 Time 00 : 00 : 10 Audio 1 / 1 MLP 5.1 Ch 96 k / 24 bit Subtitle 1 / 1 Angle 1 / 1 Page 1 / q English GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH VCD PROG Track 1 / 7 00 : 00 : 10 Numeric buttons (0-9) RANDOM REPEAT Time Track Elapsed A B CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH e STOP PAUSE PLAY SKIP TOP MENU ON SCREEN MENU RETURN ON SCREEN / / / 1: Current title or group number/total number of titles or groups 2: Current chapter or track number/total number of chapters or tracks 3: Elapsed time 4: Time remaining 5: Elapsed time (You can input numbers for time search.) 6: Audio information 7: Current angle number/total number of available angles 8: Current subtitle number/total number of available subtitle languages 9: Data transmission speeds 0: Current audio number/total number of available audio languages q: Current page number/total number of pages w: Time (You can select a category of time.) e: Category of time being displayed on w 21 En

24 DISC OPERATION To select a title (DVD-Video)/group (DVD-Audio) 1 Press / / / repeatedly to highlight 1, and then enter a title/group number using the numeric buttons (0-9). 2 Press. To select a chapter (DVD-Video)/track (VCD/SVCD/DVD-Audio) 1 Press / / / repeatedly to highlight 2, and then enter a chapter or track number using the numeric buttons (0-9). 2 Press. To search for a time 1 Press / / / repeatedly to highlight 5, and then enter hours, minutes and seconds from left to right using the numeric buttons (0-9). 2 Press. Note When searching for a time, if you enter a time outside the total time for the group/track currently being played back, the inhibition icon ( ) is displayed. To select an angle/subtitle/audio 1 Press / / / repeatedly to highlight 7, 8 or 0, and then enter a audio, subtitle or angle number using the numeric buttons (0-9). 2 Press. To select a category of time (VCD/SVCD/CD) Press / / / repeatedly to highlight w, and then press to toggle between the category of time. To exit from the OSD menu Press ON SCREEN. Displaying text information (SA-CD) Some SA-CD discs contain text information (e.g., track name, album name, artist name etc.). If SA-CD text is available on the disc, the track name is automatically displayed on the TV screen once you load the disc. To display the album/artist name During playback, press ON SCREEN. Picture Setting menu (DVD/VCD/SVCD) This unit comes with 10 sets of picture color settings that you can define yourself. Adjusting picture settings 1 Press ON SCREEN twice during playback. The Picture Setting menu appears on the TV screen. 2 Press / to highlight the desired parameter and / to adjust the selected parameter. Note Picture Setting 01/09 You cannot change the [Angle]/[Subtitle]/[Audio] setting if the function is not available on the disc you are playing. To select a page (DVD-Audio) 1 Press / / / repeatedly to highlight q, and then enter a page number using the numeric buttons (0-9). 2 Press. Brightness Move : Adjust : 3 Press ON SCREEN to exit from the setup menu. You can adjust the following parameters. Brightness Set this to adjust the overall brightness of the image. Contrast Set this to adjust the bright areas (white level) in the image. Hue Set this to adjust the hue or phase of the image En

25 DISC OPERATION Sharpness Mid Set this to adjust the sharpness of the image for the intermediate frequencies. Sharpness High Set this to adjust the sharpness of the image for the high frequencies. DNR Set this to reduce video noise. Gamma Set this to adjust the intensity of the picture non-linearly. Chroma level Set this to adjust the density of the color. Chroma delay Set this to adjust the advance delay of the chroma signal for a perfectly clear picture. True Life Set this to adjust the intensity of the picture details. A positive value enables you to reproduce the minute signals of video sources. This function is only available for progressive scan (using the component video jacks) and HDMI output. Availability of picture settings varies according to the connection and settings. HDMI Progressive (Component) Interlaced (Component) Brightness 0 to +6 0 to +6 0 to +6 Contrast 6 to +6 6 to +6 6 to +6 Hue 6 to +6 6 to +6 6 to +6 (S-video and CVBS only) Sharpness Mid Sharpness High Not available Not available 6 to +6 6 to +6 6 to +6 6 to +6 DNR 0 to +6 0 to +6 0 to +6 Gamma Chroma level Chroma delay Not available 6 to +6 6 to +6 6 to +6 6 to +6 6 to +6 Not available 2 to +2 2 to +2 True Life 0 to +6 0 to +6 Not available Zooming pictures (DVD-Video/VCD/SVCD/DivX / JPEG) You can enlarge the picture on the TV screen and to pan through the enlarged picture. 1 During playback, press ZOOM repeatedly to display the picture at different scales (ZOOM 150%, 200%, 300%, or 400%). 2 Press / / / to pan through the enlarged picture. 3 Press ZOOM repeatedly to return to the original size. Viewing angles (DVD-Video) If the disc contains sequences recorded from different camera angles, you can view the picture from a number of different angles. Note MENU TOP MENU ON SCREEN SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM RETURN / / / ZOOM ANGLE Viewing angles available for each disc may vary. Refer to the operating instructions in the DVD menu or on its jacket. Press ANGLE repeatedly to select the desired angle. English Note All picture settings are not available for CVBS (composite video) and S-video ouput. 23 En

26 DISC OPERATION Audio and Subtitle languages (DVD-Video/VCD) If the disc contains multi-language options, you can select audio/subtitle languages. Note Languages available for each disc may vary. Refer to the operating instructions in the disc menu or on its jacket. y You can set default audio/subtitle languages in the setup menu (see Setting the audio, subtitle and disc menu languages on page 17). SUBTITLE AUDIO Selecting an audio language Note SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio language. For VCD, this function is only available when the [Analog Output] setting is set to [Stereo] (see Setting the analog output on page 31). Selecting a subtitle language (DVD-Video) Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle language. DivX external subtitle files The font sets listed below are available for DivX external subtitle files. To watch DivX discs with the desired font set, set the default subtitle language setting in the setup menu to the desired language (see Setting the audio, subtitle and disc menu languages on page 17). This unit supports the following languages: Albanian, Breton, Bulgarian, Byelorussian, Catalan, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Faroese, Finnish, French, German, Hungarian, Icelandic, Irish, Italian, Kurdish (Latin), Macedonian, Greek, Hebrew, Moldavian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Slovak, Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, Ukrainian Notes Some discs cannot be played depending on disc characteristics or recording conditions. Some external subtitle files may be displayed incorrectly or not at all. For external subtitle files, the following filename extensions of subtitle format are supported (note that these files are not shown within the disc navigation menu):.srt,.sub,.ssa,.smi,.ass,.txt,.psb,.sami The filename of the movie file has to be same as the filename for the external subtitle file. For a movie file, only one external subtitle file can be loaded. Changing pages (DVD-Audio) Many DVD-Audio discs include slide show and page turn capabilities. You can display information pages for photo galleries, artist biographies, lyrics, etc. if the function is available for the disc. Press PAGE (+/ ) repeatedly to move to the next/previous page. DIMMER HDMI AUDIO DIRECT STANDBY GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH PAGE (+/ ) PROG 24 En

27 DISC OPERATION Group/File selection (DVD-Audio/ DivX /MP3/WMA/Kodak picture CD) You can select a track in a specific group for DVD-Audio discs and a track/file in a folder for data disc. Bonus group playback (DVD-Audio) Some DVD-Audio discs contain bonus groups that require a four-digit password to gain access. In this case, refer to the disc jacket and other packaging for information. English GROUP GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH PROG GROUP GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH PROG Numeric buttons (0-9) RANDOM REPEAT Numeric buttons (0-9) RANDOM REPEAT CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH A B CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH A B STOP PAUSE PLAY STOP PAUSE PLAY SKIP SKIP TOP MENU ON SCREEN TOP MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN MENU RETURN / MENU RETURN / Selecting a group (DVD-Audio) 1 Press GROUP. A group icon appears on the TV screen. 1 Press GROUP. A group icon appears on the TV screen. DVD AUDIO Group 01 / 08 DVD AUDIO Move : Select : Enter Group Move : 01 / 08 Select : Enter 2 Use / or the numeric buttons (0-9) to select a group number. 3 Press. Selecting a file in a folder (DivX /MP3/WMA/Kodak picture CD) 1 Press / to select a folder, and then press to open the folder. 2 Press / to select a file, and then press. Playback starts from the selected file. If you use the numeric buttons (0-9) to select a file, playback starts from the selected file automatically. 2 Use / or the numeric buttons (0-9) to select a bonus group number, and then press. 3 Enter a four-digit password using the numeric buttons (0-9), and then press. 4 Press / to select a track, and then press. Changing the playback area and layer (SA-CD) There are three types of SA-CD discs: single-layer, duallayer and hybrid. Each type may contain up to two areas of recorded information: a High Quality Stereo area and a High Quality Multi-channel area. You can switch between the SA-CD multi-channel and SA-CD stereo areas. y You can also change the analog output setting using the setup menu (see Setting the analog output on page 31). 25 En

28 DISC OPERATION GROUP MULTI 2CH PAGE Media Player MULTI /2CH Time 00 : 00 : 10 PROG ROOT RANDOM SCRNE JPEG REPEAT A B CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH STOP STOP (.. 0 JPG A_0510 JPG B_0618 JPG B_0630 JPG C_ JPG C_ PLAY PAUSE ) Move : Select : Enter 2 Press / to select a folder, and then press to open the folder. 1 Press STOP ( 7 ) to stop playback. 2 Press MULTI / 2CH. MULTI indicator lights up when the multi-channel area is selected. To move to the upper folder, select the folder icon with two dots when disc playback is stopped. 3 Press / to select a file, and then press. Multimedia file playback (MP3/WMA/DivX /JPEG) Playback starts from the selected file. If you use the numeric buttons (0-9) to select a file, playback starts from the selected file automatically. You can play MP3, WMA, DivX and JPEG files on a personally recorded CD-R/RW disc or commercial CD. Notes Displaying the thumbnail screen (JPEG) Some files cannot be played correctly depending on disc characteristics or recording conditions. This unit supports JPEG files of 2848 x 2136 pixels in size. However, some files may not be displayed correctly depending on the aspect ratio of the image. 1 Press MENU during playback. The thumbnail pictures appear on the TV screen. y You can set the duration for each image of a slide show (see Setting the duration for a slide show on page 38). PROG Numeric buttons (0-9) RANDOM REPEAT A B CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH STOP STOP ( 2 Press SKIP (l22 / 33l) to display the other pictures on the previous/next page. PLAY PAUSE 3 Press ) SKIP TOP MENU SKIP ( / ) 4 Press STOP ( 7 ) to return to the data disc ON SCREEN / / MENU / menu. RETURN MENU 1 Load a disc in the disc tray. Playback starts automatically. For MP3 and WMA, the data disc menu appears on the TV screen. For DivX and JPEG, press STOP ( 7 ) during playback to display the data disc menu. 26 En / / / to highlight one of the pictures, and then press to start playback. Rotating pictures (JPEG) During playback, press / / rotate the picture on the TV screen. / to : rotates the picture counter-clockwise by 90 degrees : rotates the picture clockwise by 90 degrees, : rotates the picture by 180 degrees

29 SETUP MENU Menu overview SETUP MENU y The initial setting for each parameter is indicated in bold. If the settings you have made are inappropriate, you can always reset all options and your personal settings to the initial factory settings. For details, see Resetting the system on page 30. English Main Menu Menu item Setting Item/Submenu Setting item/parameter GENERAL DVD-Audio mode DVD-Audio, DVD-Video SA-CD mode OSD Language SA-CD, CD Asia model: English, Korea model: English, 한국어 Parental Rating (Enter your password) Level 1 to Level 8 Parental Password (Enter your password) New Password, Confirm Password Screen Saver On, Off Auto Power Off Mode 1, Mode 2, Off Sleep Timer Off, 30min, 60min, 90min,120min,150min Factory Default (Enter your password) Yes, No DivX Registration (DivX registration code is displayed) Enter AUDIO Analog Output Stereo, Multi-Channel Digital Out All, PCM, Off LPCM Output 48KHz, 96KHz Night Listening Mode On, Off SPEAKER Size Front L/R Large, Small Center, Surround L/R Large, Small, Off Subwoofer On, Off Initialize On, Off Distance Unit Feet, Meter Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R 0.3m to 12.0m (1ft to 40ft) Default setting: 3.0m (10ft) Initialize On, Off Level Front L, Center, Front R, Surround L, Surround R, 0dB to 12dB Subwoofer Test Tone Off, Manual, Auto Initialize On, Off SA-CD SA-CD Config Config 1, Config 2, Config 3 CUT-OFF Frequency 60, 80, 100, 120 VIDEO TV Display 16:9, 4:3 Pan Scan, 4:3 Letter Box TV Type Asia model: MULTI, NTSC, PAL Korea model: MULTI, NTSC, PAL Wide Screen Format NL Stretch, Pillar Box, Off Black Level (U.S.A. and On, Off Canada models only) Closed Caption (U.S.A. On, Off and Canada models only) Still Mode Frame, Field Component Progressive, Interlaced Scart Video Out (U.K., Europe, CVBS, RGB and Russia models only) HDMI HDMI Video 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, Auto DVI Output Range Standard, Enhanced HDMI Audio Auto, PCM, Off DISC AUDIO Language Off ([Subtitle Language] only), English, French, Subtitle Language DVD Menu Language Angle Mark Spanish, Japanese, German, Italian, Russian, Others On, Off PBC On, Off Time Interval 2 sec to 10 sec, Default setting: 3 sec 27 En

30 SETUP MENU Setup menu operation Setup is carried out on the TV screen, enabling you to customize this unit to suit your own particular requirements. Follow the procedures below to start the setup menu operations. REPEAT 2 Press / to select the desired main menu, and then press. Menu items and setting items appear. SPEAKER Size Distance Level SA-CD 1/1 A B CLEAR SETUP SETUP STOP SLOW SEARCH PAUSE PLAY Move : Return Select : Enter SKIP / / / MENU TOP MENU ON SCREEN RETURN RETURN 3 Press / to highlight the desired menu item. If the selected menu item has submenus, only a right arrow is displayed on the side of the setting item. In this case, press, and then repeat step 3. SPEAKER 1/1 SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM SA-CD Config CUT-OFF Frequency Config y Press RETURN to display the previous menu. Press SETUP to exit from the setup menu. Refer to the following pages for details of the menu that requires a particular operation. 1 Press SETUP. Main menus and menu items appear on your TV. SETUP GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER VIDEO HDMI DISC DVD-Audio mode SA-CD mode OSD Language Parental Rating Parental Password Screen Saver Auto Power Off Sleep Timer 1/2 Move : Return Select : Enter If the selected menu item has only setting items, left and right arrows appear on both sides of the setting item. AUDIO Analog Output Digital Out LPCM Output Night Listening Mode Move : Return Stereo PCM 96KHz Off 1/1 Select : Enter Move : Return Select : Enter 4 Press / to toggle the setting items or to adjust the parameter. 28 En

31 SETUP MENU General setup menu SETUP 1/2 GENERAL AUDIO DVD-Audio mode SA-CD mode OSD Language SPEAKER VIDEO Parental Rating Parental Password Screen Saver HDMI DISC Auto Power Off Sleep Timer Move : Return Select : Enter Notes This setting is only available when no disc is loaded in the disc tray. Selected mode becomes effective after you close the setup menu. When you select [CD], this unit does not play back SA-CD discs which do not have CD layer. Setting the OSD language This menu contains various options for the on-screen display (OSD) language. For details, see Setting the OSD (On-Screen Display) language on page 17. English Selecting DVD-Audio mode Some DVD-Audio discs contain the DVD-Video content in addition to the DVD-Audio content. You can select DVD-Audio or DVD-Video mode. Select [DVD-Audio mode] in [GENERAL] menu. DVD-Audio Select this to play back both DVD-Audio and DVD-Video contents. Only the DVD-Audio content may be played back depending on the disc. DVD-Video Select this to play back only the DVD-Video content. Notes This setting is only available when no disc is loaded in the disc tray. Selected mode becomes effective after you close the setup menu. y When a DVD-Audio disc is played back, the DVD AUDIO indicator lights up. When you select [DVD-Video], the DVD AUDIO indicator goes out. Selecting SA-CD mode Some SA-CD discs contain both SA-CD layer and the standard CD layer. You can select SA-CD or CD mode. Select [SA-CD mode] in [GENERAL] menu. SA-CD Select this to play back SA-CD layer. CD Select this to play back CD layer. Restricting playback with parental control Some DVD discs have a parental level assigned to the complete disc or to certain scenes on the disc. This feature lets you set a playback limitation level. The rating levels are from 1 to 8 and are country dependent. You can prohibit playback of certain discs that are not suitable for your children or play certain discs in alternative scenes. 1 Select [Parental Rating] in [GENERAL] menu. 2 Enter your four-digit password using the numeric buttons (0-9). (For details about the password, see Changing the parental password below.) If the password is correct, [Parental Rating] is enabled to select. 3 Press / to select the rating level. To disable parental controls and have all discs play, select [Level 8]. Notes VCD, SVCD, CD and SA-CD have no level indication, so the parental control function has no effect with these types of discs. Some DVD discs are not encoded with a rating though the movie rating may be printed on the disc cover. The rating level feature does not work for such discs. Changing the parental password You can change the password for parental control. Enter your four-digit password when prompted on the screen. The default password is Select [Parental Password] in [GENERAL] menu. 29 En

32 SETUP MENU 2 Enter your old four-digit password using the numeric buttons (0-9). When doing this for the first time, enter If the password is correct, the submenu appears. 3 Enter the new four-digit password using the numeric buttons (0-9). [Confirm Password] is highlighted. 4 Enter the new four-digit password again. The previous menu screen appears and the new four-digit password is now valid. Resetting the system You can reset all options and your personal settings to the initial factory settings, except [Parental Rating] and [Parental Password]. 1 Select [Factory Default] in [GENERAL] menu. 2 Enter your four-digit password using the numeric buttons (0-9). (For details about the password, see Changing the parental password on page 29.) The confirmation screen appears. Setting the screen saver GENERAL 2/2 You can turn on or off the screen saver. Select [Screen Saver] in [GENERAL] menu. On Select this to turn on the screen saver when disc playback is stopped for more than 15 minutes. Off Select this to disable the screen saver function. Setting the auto power function You can set the auto standby mode. Select [Auto Power Off] in [GENERAL] menu. Mode 1 Select this to set this unit to the standby mode automatically when disc playback is stopped for more than 30 minutes or disc playback is continued for more than six hours without operation. Mode 2 Select this to set this unit to the standby mode automatically when disc playback is stopped for more than 30 minutes. Off Select this to disable the auto power off function. Setting the sleep timer You can set this unit to the standby mode automatically after a certain elapsed period. Select [Sleep Timer] in [GENERAL] menu. 30min, 60min, 90min, 120min, 150min Select one to set the sleep timer function. Off Select this to cancel the sleep timer function. 3 Press / to select [Yes] to reset the system, and then press. All settings are reset to the initial factory settings. Displaying the DivX VOD registration code Yamaha provides you with the DivX VOD (Video On Demand) registration code that allows you to rent and purchase videos using the DivX VOD service. For more information, visit at 1 Select [DivX Registration] in [GENERAL] menu. 2 Press. The registration code appears. 3 Press to return to the previous menu. y To purchase or rent the videos from DivX VOD service at use the registration code and download the video onto a CD-R for playback on this unit. Notes Factory Default DivX Regis Factory Default Move : Press [Yes] to confirm Yes Return.... Select : Enter All videos downloaded from DivX VOD can only be played back on this unit. The time search function is not available during DivX movie playback. No 30 En

33 SETUP MENU Audio setup menu SETUP GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER VIDEO HDMI DISC Move : Analog Output Digital Out LPCM Output Night Listening Mode Return Setting the analog output Set the analog output to match the playback capability of this unit. Select [Analog Output] in [AUDIO] menu. Stereo Select this to change channel output to stereo, which only delivers sound from the two front speakers. Multi-Channel Select this when using a multi-channel audio/(video) receiver with 6 channel inputs. In this mode, this unit performs DTS decoding or Dolby Digital 5.1-channel decoding when applicable. Setting the digital output Set the digital output according to your optional audio component connections. Select [Digital Out] in [AUDIO] menu. All Select this if you have connected the digital audio output jack to a multi-channel decoder/receiver. PCM Select this only if your receiver is not capable of decoding multi-channel audio signals. Off Select this to turn off the digital output. 1/1 Select : Enter Setting the LPCM output Set the LPCM output if you have connected this unit to a PCM-compatible receiver via a digital terminal, such as the coaxial or optical terminals. Discs are recorded at a certain sampling rate. The higher the sampling rate, the better the sound quality. Select [LPCM Output] in [AUDIO] menu. 48KHz Select this to play back discs recorded at the sampling rate of 48 khz. All 96 khz PCM data streams (if available) are converted to the sampling rate of 48 khz. 96KHz Select this to play back discs recorded at the sampling rate of 96 khz. If the 96 khz disc is copy protected, the digital output is automatically converted to a sampling rate of 48 khz. Setting the night listening mode In this mode, high volume output is softened and low volume output is brought upward to an audible level. It is useful when you watch your favorite action movie without disturbing others at night. Select [Night Listening Mode] in [AUDIO] menu. On Select this to level out the volume. This feature is only available for movies with Dolby Digital mode. Off Select this when you want to enjoy the full dynamic range of surround sound. Note This mode is only effective for analog output. English 31 En

34 SETUP MENU Speaker setup menu SETUP GENERAL Size Distance AUDIO Level SPEAKER SA-CD VIDEO HDMI 1/1 Initialize You can reset [Size] settings to the initial factory settings. 1 Select [Initialize] under [Size] in [SPEAKER] menu. 2 Press. The confirmation screen appears. 3 Select [Yes] to reset the setting, and then press. [Size] settings are reset to the initial factory settings. Setting speaker sizes You can set the sizes for individual speakers. Select [Size] in [SPEAKER] menu. Front L/R Set the sizes for front L/R speakers. Large Select this if the connected speakers are large. Small Select this if the connected speakers are small. Center, Surround L/R Set the sizes for center/surround L/R speakers. Large Select this if the connected speakers are large. Small Select this if the connected speakers are small. Off Select this if no center/surround L/R speakers are connected. Subwoofer Select on or off for the subwoofer. On Select this if a subwoofer is connected. Off Select this if no subwoofer is connected. Notes DISC Move : Return Select : Enter These settings are not available for SA-CD discs. See Setting the SA-CD configuration on page 33 for the SA-CD setting. [Center], [Surround L/R] and [Subwoofer] settings are not available when the [Analog Output] setting is set to [Stereo] (see Setting the analog output on page 31). Setting speaker distances You can set the distances for individual speakers. Placing all speakers except for the subwoofer at equal distances from the listener is the most ideal way of the speaker positioning in 5.1 channel system. Select [Distance] in [SPEAKER] menu. Unit You can select the display unit of measurement. Feet Select this to input speaker distances in feet. Meter Select this to input speaker distances in meters. Front L/R Set the distance from your listening position to the front speakers. We recommend to place the front left speaker and right speaker at the same distance from the listening position. Center Set the distance from your listening position to the center speaker. Surround L/R Set the distance from your listening position to the surround speakers. We recommend to place the surround left speaker and right speaker at the same distance from the listening position. Control range: 0.3m to 12.0m (1ft to 40ft) Control step: 0.3m (1ft) Notes For the [Center] setting, you cannot specify the distance beyond the [Front L/R] setting or below the [Front L/R] setting minus 1.5m (5ft). For the [Surround L/R] setting, you cannot specify the distance beyond the [Front L/R] setting or below the [Front L/R] setting minus 4.5m (15ft). 32 En

35 SETUP MENU Initialize You can reset [Distance] settings to the initial factory settings. 1 Select [Initialize] under [Distance] in [SPEAKER] menu. 2 Press. The confirmation screen appears. 3 Select [Yes] to reset the setting, and then press. [Distance] settings are reset to the initial factory settings. Setting speaker levels You can set the volume levels for individual speakers. Select [Level] in [SPEAKER] menu. Front L, Center, Front R, Surround L, Surround R, Subwoofer Set the volume levels for front L/R speakers, center speaker, surround L/R speakers or subwoofer. Control range: 0dB to 12dB Control step: 1dB Test Tone A test tone can be output to help you judge the volume level of each speaker. 1 Select [Test Tone] under [Level] in [SPEAKER] menu. 2 Press / to select [Off], [Manual] or [Auto]. Off Select this to output no test tone. Manual Select this to output the test tone manually. Auto Select this to output the test tone from each speaker automatically. 3 For [Auto], press / to select [Yes], and then press to output the test tone. For [Manual], press / to select each speaker, and then press to output the test tone. Initialize You can reset [Level] settings to the initial factory settings. 1 Select [Initialize] under [Level] in [SPEAKER] menu. 2 Press. The confirmation screen appears. 3 Select [Yes] to reset the setting, and then press. [Level] settings are reset to the initial factory settings. Setting the SA-CD configuration You can select speaker sizes and on/off statuses for SA-CD discs. You can also select a cut-off (cross-over) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency are sent to the subwoofer. Select [SA-CD] in [SPEAKER] menu. SA-CD Config Select speaker sizes and on/off statuses from the following three settings. Speaker Size or on/off Config 1 Config 2 Config 3 Front L/R Large Small Large Center Large Small Small Surround L/R Large Small Small Subwoofer On On Off CUT-OFF Frequency Select a cut-off (cross-over) frequency for all lowfrequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency are sent to the subwoofer. Control range: 60, 80, 100, 120 (Hz) English Notes The test tone is not output from a center speaker, surround speakers, and a subwoofer when the [Analog Output] setting is set to [Stereo] (see Setting the analog output on page 31). These settings are only effective for analog output. 33 En

36 SETUP MENU Video setup menu SETUP GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER VIDEO HDMI DISC Move : TV Display TV Type Wide Screen Format Black Level*1 Closed Caption*1 Still Mode Component Scart Video Out*2 Return Setting the TV display Set the aspect ratio of this unit to match your TV. The format you select must be available on the disc. Select [TV Display] in [VIDEO] menu. 4:3 Pan Scan Select this if the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. In this setting, both sides of the picture to be trimmed or formatted to fit your TV screen. 4:3 Letter Box Select this if the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3. In this setting, a wide picture with black bands on the upper and lower portions of the TV screen are displayed. 16:9 Select this if you have a widescreen TV. The relationship between the setting of this unit and the TV display When the aspect ratio of your TV is 16:9 (widescreen): 1/1 Select : Enter *1: [Black Level] and [Closed Caption] are only for U.S.A. and Canada models. *2: [Scart Video Out] is only for U.K., Europa, and Russia models. Setting 16:9 Playback disc 16:9 TV display 4:3 *1 When the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3: Setting 4:3 Pan Scan 4:3 Letter Box Playback disc 16:9 4:3 16:9 4:3 *1: The side of the picture may be stretched depending on the TV. In this case, check the screen size and aspect ratio of your TV. *2: If the disc is not assigned to play back with panscan, it is played with letterbox. Setting the TV type TV display This menu contains the options for selecting the color system that matches your TV. For details, see Step 3: Setting a TV type on page 16. Selecting the wide screen format *2 Set the aspect ratio of the projected images on the screen. This function is only available for progressive scan and HDMI output. Select [Wide Screen Format] in [VIDEO] menu. NL Stretch Select this to display of 4:3 image on the 16:9 screen with non-linear stretching. (The center position of the screen is stretched less than the side.) Pillar Box Select this to display 4:3 image on the 16:9 screen without stretching. Even when this unit is playing a disc recorded in the 16:9 squeeze mode, the picture is displayed in the center of the screen. Off Select this to make no aspect ratio adjustment. 34 En

37 SETUP MENU Selecting the black level (U.S.A. and Canada models only) If you set the [TV Type] to [NTSC] (see Step 3: Setting a TV type on page 16), set this setting shift to [On] to improve the color contrast during playback. Select [Black Level] in [VIDEO] menu. On Select this to enhance the black level. Off Select this for the standard black level setting. Setting the still mode You can select the picture quality for pausing or frame-byframe playback. Select [Still Mode] in [VIDEO] menu. Frame Select this if the picture is unstable when you select [Field]. Field Select this for the standard still mode setting. This setting is suitable for playback of quick motion scenes. English Notes This function is only available for CVBS (composite video) and S-video output. This setting has no effect if the [TV Type] is set to [PAL] or [MULTI] (see Step 3: Setting a TV type on page 16). Selecting the closed caption (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Closed captions are data hidden in the video signals of specific discs, and are invisible without the use of a special decoder. The difference between subtitles and captions is that subtitles are intended for hearing persons and captions are for the hearing impaired. Subtitles rarely show all of the audio. For example, captions show sound effects (e.g., phone ringing and footsteps ), while subtitles do not. Before you select this setting, please ensure that the disc contains closed caption information and your TV set also supports this function. Select [Closed Caption] in [VIDEO] menu. On Select this to enable the closed caption function. Off Select this to disable the closed caption function. Note This function is only available for CVBS (composite video) and S-video output. Selecting the scan function This function is only available if you have connected this unit to a progressive scan TV through the component video jacks (see Component video jacks <C> on page 12). This function is enable you to enjoy accurate color reproduction and high quality images. This unit features DCDi circuit. Select [Component] in [VIDEO] menu. Progressive Select this to enable the progressive scan function. The confirmation screen appears if you select this. In this case, select [Yes] and then press. Interlaced Select this to enable the interlaced scan function. y The P.SCAN indicator on the front panel display lights up during progressive playback. Notes on activating progressive scan: While HDMI video signals are being output, component video is fixed to interlaced video. In progressive mode, 4:3 aspect images are stretched horizontally on the widescreen TV. Change the aspect ratio settings of your TV if you want to watch the original aspect ratio images without distortion. You can also change the aspect ratio settings in [Wide Screen Format] menu (see Selecting the wide screen format on page 34). Ensure that your TV is equipped with progressive scan. Connect using a component video cable. 35 En

38 SETUP MENU CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO THE STANDARD DEFINITION OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR VIDEO MONITOR COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525P AND 625P DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER SERVICE C. This unit is compatible with the complete line of Yamaha products, including the projectors DPX-1300, DPX-830 and the plasma monitor PDM HDMI setup menu SETUP 1/1 GENERAL AUDIO HDMI Video DVI Output Range HDMI Audio SPEAKER VIDEO HDMI DISC Move : Return Select : Enter Switching the SCART video out (U.K., Europe, and Russia models only) Select this setting to toggle the video signal output from the AV terminal between CVBS (composite video) and RGB. Select [Scart Video Out] in [VIDEO] menu. CVBS Select this to output composite video signals. RGB Select this to output RGB video signals. Note This unit does not output S-video signal from the AV terminal. Setting the HDMI video You can adjust the resolution depending on the monitor you are using. This function is only available when this unit is connected to an HDMI-compatible component via the HDMI jack. This unit is compatible with the following video formats: 480p/60 Hz, 576p/50 Hz, 720p/50 Hz, 60 Hz, 1080i/50 Hz, 60 Hz, and 1080p/50 Hz, 60 Hz. Select [HDMI Video] in [HDMI] menu. 480p/576p Select this for 480/576 progressive-scan video. 720p Select this for 720 progressive-scan video. 1080i Select this for 1080 interlaced-scan video. 1080p Select this for 1080 progressive-scan video. Auto Select this to set this unit to the best resolution setting automatically based on your monitor. Notes When [TV Type] is set to [NTSC] or [PAL], video signals with 480p or 576p are output accordingly. While HDMI video signals are being output, component video is fixed to interlaced video. For settings other than [Auto], make sure that the selected resolution is supported by the HDMI-compatible monitor you are using. If the selected resolution is not supported, this setting is automatically switched to the most appropriate resolution, and the newly selected resolution is displayed in the top left corner of the display and in the front panel display temporarily. When you select [1080p] and use an HDMI cable longer than 5 m (16 ft), the picture quality may decrease. 36 En

39 SETUP MENU y Refer to the manual supplied with your monitor to select the appropriate aspect ratio. You can also select the HDMI resolution by pressing HDMI on the remote control repeatedly. DISC setup menu SETUP 1/1 English Selecting the DVI output range You can select the DVI output range to match the connected component. This function is only available when this unit is connected to an DVI-D-compatible component via the HDMI jack. Select [DVI Output Range] in [HDMI] menu. Standard Select this if you cannot see the correct image when you select [Enhanced]. Enhanced Select this if black and white in the image is not distinct. Setting the HDMI audio Set the HDMI audio output to match the connected component. This function is only available when this unit is connected to an HDMI-compatible component via the HDMI jack. For details about the relationship between the audio format and the setting, see HDMI audio output on page 13. Select [HDMI Audio] in [HDMI] menu. Auto Select this to set this unit to the best setting automatically based on the component you have connected via the HDMI jack. PCM Select this to output the decoded multi-channel or 2ch linear PCM audio signals via the HDMI jack. Off Select this to turn off the HDMI audio output. GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER VIDEO HDMI DISC Move : AUDIO Language Subtitle Language DVD Menu Language Angle Mark PBC Time Interval Return Select : Enter Selecting the default audio/subtitle/ DVD menu language These menus contain various language options for the audio, subtitles and disc menus recorded on the DVD. For details, see Setting the audio, subtitle and disc menu languages on page 17. Selecting an angle mark display You can switch an angle mark display on or off when sequences recorded from different camera angles are played back. Select [Angle Mark] in [DISC] menu. On Select this if you want to display an angle mark. An angle mark is displayed continuously. Off Select this if you do not want to display an angle mark. An angle mark appears for five seconds, and then disappears. Notes SA-CD signals cannot be output using HDMI. When [HDMI Audio] is set to [Auto] or [PCM], digital output signals are muted. 37 En

40 SETUP MENU Selecting the PBC (playback control) function You can set playback control (PBC) to on or off. This function is available only on Video CD 2.0 with the playback control (PBC) feature. Select [PBC] in [DISC] menu. On Select this to display a disc menu. Off Select this not to display a disc menu. y You can also use the MENU button on the remote control to turn on or off the playback control (PBC) function (see Using the Video CD playback control (PBC) menu (VCD/SVCD) on page 21). Setting the duration for a slide show You can set the duration that the slides for JPEG files are displayed. Select [Time Interval] in [DISC] menu. 2 sec to 10 sec Control step: 1 second Note This setting may not work correctly depending on file sizes. 38 En

41 LANGUAGE CODE LIST LANGUAGE CODE LIST English Abkhazian 1112 Fiji 1620 Lingala 2224 Singhalese 2919 Afar 1111 Finnish 1619 Lithuanian 2230 Slovak 2921 Afrikaans 1116 French 1628 Macedonian 2321 Slovenian 2922 Albanian 2927 Frisian 1635 Malagasy 2317 Somali 2925 Amharic 1123 Galician 1722 Malay 2329 Spanish 1529 Arabic 1128 Georgian 2111 Malayalam 2322 Sundanese 2931 Armenian 1835 German 1415 Maltese 2330 Swahili 2933 Assamese 1129 Greek 1522 Maori 2319 Swedish 2932 Aymara 1135 Greenlandic 2122 Marathi 2328 Tagalog 3022 Azerbaijani 1136 Guarani 1724 Moldavian 2325 Tajik 3017 Bashkir 1211 Gujarati 1731 Mongolian 2324 Tamil 3011 Basque 1531 Hausa 1811 Nauru 2411 Tatar 3030 Bengali; Bangla 1224 Hebrew 1933 Nepali 2415 Telugu 3015 Bhutani 1436 Hindi 1819 Norwegian 2425 Thai 3018 Bihari 1218 Hungarian 1831 Oriya 2528 Tibetan 1225 Breton 1228 Icelandic 1929 Panjabi 2611 Tigrinya 3019 Bulgarian 1217 Indonesian 1924 Pashto, Pushto 2629 Tonga 3025 Burmese 2335 Interlingua 1911 Persian 1611 Turkish 3028 Byelorussian 1215 Irish 1711 Polish 2622 Turkmen 3021 Cambodian 2123 Italian 1930 Portuguese 2630 Twi 3033 Catalan 6765 Japanese 2011 Quechua 2731 Ukrainian 3121 Chinese 3618 Javanese 2033 Raeto-Romance 2823 Urdu 3128 Corsican 1325 Kannada 2124 Romanian 2825 Uzbek 3136 Croatian 1828 Kashmiri 2129 Russian 2831 Vietnamese 3219 Czech 1329 Kazakh 2121 Samoan 2923 Volapük 3225 Danish 1411 Kirghiz 2135 Sanskrit 2911 Welsh 1335 Dutch 2422 Korean 2125 Scots Gaelic 1714 Wolof 3325 English 1524 Kurdish 2131 Serbian 2928 Xhosa 3418 Esperanto 1525 Laothian 2225 Serbo-Croatian 2918 Yiddish 2019 Estonian 1530 Latin 2211 Shona 2924 Yoruba 3525 Faroese 1625 Latvian, Lettish 2232 Sindhi 2914 Zulu En

42 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. Problem Solution No power Connect the AC power cable properly. 14 No picture Completely distorted picture or black/white picture The screen size looks unnatural, or the caption is displayed only partially on the TV monitor or is not displayed at all Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel of this unit to turn on the power. Refer to the manual supplied with your TV for correct Video In channel selection. Change the TV channel until you see the DVD screen. See page Turn on your TV. Make sure that all connections on this unit and on all other components are secure. If [Component] is set to [Progressive], check that you have connected this unit to a progressive scan TV through the component video jacks. Otherwise, follow the steps below to turn off the progressive scan; 1. Press on the front panel to open the disc tray. 2. Press CLEAR on the remote control. 3. Press 2580 using the numeric buttons (0-9) on the remote control. 4. Press AUDIO on the remote control. If [HDMI Video] is set to other than [Auto], check that the resolution is supported by the HDMI-compatible monitor you have connected. Otherwise, follow the steps below to change the setting to [Auto]; 1. Press s twice on the front panel or STOP ( 7 ) twice on the remote control to stop playback. 2. Press and hold s and p/e on the front panel at the same time for three seconds. If the HDMI indicator flashes orange, check that you have connected this unit to an HDCP-compatible component. Check that the video signal output setting matches the video connection. Check that the disc is compatible with this unit. 3 Check that the TV type of this unit is set to match that of the disc and your TV. If you set the TV type improperly, follow the steps below to restore the TV Type setting to the default setting; 1. Press on the front panel to open the disc tray. 2. Press CLEAR on the remote control. 3. Press 2580 using the numeric buttons (0-9) on the remote control. 4. Press AUDIO on the remote control. Check the video connection. 11 Check that the TV setting of this unit matches the screen aspect ratio of your TV. Change the screen size and the aspect ratio of your TV En

43 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Solution No sound or distorted sound Adjust the volume on the TV or the AV receiver. See page Check that the speakers are connected properly. Adjust the volume level in the setup menu. 33 No audio at digital output Check the digital connections. 11 If you are playing a DTS source, check that your receiver can decode DTS and [Digital Out] is set to [All]. If you are playing an MPEG-2 source, check that your receiver can decode MPEG-2. Otherwise, make sure that [Digital Out] is set to [PCM]. Check that the audio format of the selected audio option on the disc matches your receiver capabilities. No audio at HDMI output Make sure that [HDMI Audio] is set to [Auto] or [PCM]. 37 No audio signals via the HDMI jack are output if the DVI-D component is connected to this unit using the HDMI-DVI converter cable. To output audio signals via the HDMI jack, connect an HDMI component to this unit. Disc does not play Check that the disc format is supported. 3, 44 Picture freezes momentarily during playback This unit does not respond to the remote control Buttons do not work This unit does not respond to some operating commands during playback Menu items cannot be selected Cannot play back SA-CD disc No sound during DivX movies playback The CD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW and DVD-R/RW must be finalized. Check that the disc label is facing up. 18 Check that the disc is defective by trying another disc. If you have recorded a JPEG, MP3 or WMA disc yourself, check that your disc contains at least ten JPEG picture files or five MP3/WMA music tracks. Check the region code of the DVD disc. 3 Check the disc for fingerprints/scratches and clean it with a soft cloth wiping from the center to the edge. Aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the front panel. Reduce the distance of the remote control from this unit. 15 Replace the batteries in the remote control. 15 Reinsert the batteries with their polarities (+/ signs) as indicated. 15 Disconnect the power cable from the AC outlet for a few minutes. Reconnect the power cable and try to operate again as usual. Operations may not be permitted by the disc. Refer to the instructions of the disc jacket. Depending on the connection status or disc availability, some menu items cannot be selected. When [SA-CD mode] is set to [CD], this unit does not play back SA-CD discs which does not have CD layer. The audio code may not be supported by this unit English 41 En

44 GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Aspect ratio Horizontal and vertical ratio of a displayed image. The horizontal vs. vertical ratio of conventional TV is 4:3, and that of wide-screens is 16:9. Bit Short for binary digit. Represents the smallest unit of information manipulated on a computer. In audio systems, the bit size determines resolution to digitize analog signals. The larger the bit size, the larger the dynamic range (the ratio of maximum and minimum frequency level) and the finer the sounds. Generally, an audio CD is 16 bit and DVD audio is 24 bit. Bit rate The amount of data used to hold a given length of music; measured in kilobits per second, or kbps. Also, the speed at which you record. Generally, the higher the bit rate, or recording speed, the better the sound quality. However, higher bit rates use more space on a disc. Component video jacks Jacks for inputting or outputting a component video signal. Component video signal consists of three lines, the luminance signal (Y) and two color difference signals (PB/ CB, PR/CR), which enable to provide high-quality video. DivX DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, inc. DivX media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files can also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks. Many DivX media files are available for download online, and you can create your own using your personal content and easy-to-use tools from DivX.com. Dolby Digital Digital surround sound system which is developed by Dolby Laboratories provides completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right) and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides five full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects (called LFE, or low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. DTS Digital surround sound system developed by DTS, Inc., which provides 5.1 channel audio (max). With an abundance of audio data, it is able to provide authenticsounding effects. DVD-Audio It has developed for the sole purpose of creating high quality pure sound with Linear PCM and Packed PCM (lossless coding) in up to six audio-channels. Sampling frequencies of 192 khz/24 bits are supported. HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital A/V (audio/ video) interface. Providing an interface between any A/V source (such as a set-top box or A/V receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television DTV), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC (Advanced Television Systems Committee) HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. 42 En

45 GLOSSARY Interlace The most common type of scanning used in televisions. It divides a screen into even and odd numbered fields for scanning, and then builds an image by combining them into one image (frame). JPEG (Joint Photographic Expert Group) A standardized image compression system proposed by the Joint Photographic Expert Group. It can reduce image data sizes to 1 to 10% of their original sizes, and works on digital photographs effectively. MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) An audio file compression technology. It can reduce audio data sizes to about 10% of their original sizes while maintaining CD-level audio quality. MPEG (Moving Pictures Experts Group) International standard for digital video and audio compression generated by ISO (International Organization for Standardization) and IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). Includes MPEG-1, MPEG-2, and MPEG-3. MPEG-1 offers VHS level video quality and is often used on video CDs. MPEG-2 offers S-VHS level video quality and is often used on DVDs. Parental control Limits Disc play according to the age of the users or the limitation level in each country. The limitation varies from disc to disc; when it is activated, playback will be prohibited if the software s level is higher than the user-set level. Playback control (PBC) An on-screen menu recorded on a Video CD or SVCD that enables interactive playback and searching. Region code Many DVD discs include a region code so that the copyright owner can control DVD software distribution only to regions where they are ready to distribute. There are six regions codes, which restrict a DVD player to playing a DVD disc with the same region code. S-video jack A jack for inputting or outputting an S-video signal. S-video signal consists of two lines, the luminance signal (Y) and color signal (C), which enable to provide highquality video during playback or recording. Super Audio CD Audio format based upon the current CD standards but includes a greater amount of information that provides higher quality sound. There are three types of discs: single layer, dual layer and hybrid discs. The hybrid disc can be played on existing CD players as well as Super Audio CD players since it contains both standard audio CD and Super Audio CD information. Super Audio CD Disc Hybrid layer disc Dual layer disc Single layer disc HD layer HD layer Hybrid Super Audio CD Disc CD layer HD layer 1 CD layer that plays on any CD player High Density layer containing: 2 - High Quality DSD Stereo 3 - High Quality DSD Multichannel English Progressive Scan A method of displaying all scanning lines in a frame at once, reducing flicker noticeable on a larger screen and creating a sharp and smooth image. 43 En

46 SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS PLAYBACK SYSTEM DVD-Video DVD-Audio DVD-R, DVD-RW DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD+R DL Video CD, SVCD SA-CD multi-channel and SA-CD stereo CD PICTURE CD CD-R, CD-RW VIDEO PERFORMANCE Video (CVBS) output... 1 Vpp into 75 ohm S-video output... Y: 1 Vpp into 75 ohm C: 0.3 Vpp into 75 ohm Component video output... Y: 1 Vpp into 75 ohm PB/CB, PR/CR: 0.7 Vpp into 75 ohm RGB (SCART) output (U.K., Europe, and Russia models only) Vpp into 75 ohm Black level shift (U.S.A. models only)... On/Off AUDIO FORMAT Digital Dolby Digital / DTS / MPEG...Compressed Digital PCM... 16, 20, 24 bits / fs 44.1, 48, 88.2, 96 khz MP3 (ISO 9660) kbps / fs 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 khz WMA kbps, mono, stereo Full decoding of Dolby Digital and DTS multi-channel sound Analog stereo sound Dolby surround compatible downmix from Dolby Digital multichannel sound AUDIO PERFORMANCE DA Converter...24 bit, 192 khz Signal-Noise (1 khz) db Dynamic range (1 khz) db DVD...fs 96 khz, 2 Hz 44 khz fs 48 khz, 2 Hz 22 khz SVCD...fs 48 khz, 2 Hz 22 khz fs 44.1 khz, 2 Hz 20 khz CD/VCD...fs 44.1 khz, 2 Hz 20 khz Distortion and Noise (1 khz) % TV STANDARD Number of lines...pal: 625, NTSC: 525 Vertical frequency... PAL: 50 Hz, NTSC: 60 Hz Playback...Multistandard (PAL/NTSC) CONNECTIONS Video output... 1 (Cinch: yellow) S-video output... 1 (Mini DIN, 4 pins) Component video output Y output... 1 (Cinch: green) PB/CB output... 1 (Cinch: blue) PR/CR output... 1 (Cinch: red) SCART (U.K., Europe, and Russia models only)... 1 (Euroconnector) Digital output Coaxial... 1 (Cinch: orange) Optical...1 (IEC for CDDA/LPCM, IEC for MPEG 1/2, Dolby Digital, DTS) HDMI...1 (Type A) 2 channel analog output (L+R)...1 pair (Cinch: white/red) 6 channel analog output Audio Front L/R...1 pair (Cinch: white/red) Audio Surround L/R...1 pair (Cinch: white/red) Audio Center...1 (Cinch: black) Audio Subwoofer...1 (Cinch: black) CABINET Dimensions (W x D x H) x x 87 mm (17 1/8 x 11 3/16 x 3 7/16 inch) Weight... Approx. 3.3 kg (7 lbs. 4 oz.) POWER SUPPLY Power inlet U.S.A. and Canada models... AC 120 V, 60 Hz U.K. and Europe models... AC 230 V, 50 Hz Korea and Taiwan models... AC V, 50/60 Hz Asia model... AC V, 50/60 Hz Russia model... AC 230 V, 50 Hz Power consumption...approx. 21 W Power consumption (standby)...less than 0.5 W Specifications are subject to change without prior notice. 44 En

47 注意 : 在操作本机之前请阅读此部分 1 要确保最好的性能, 请仔细阅读此手册 请将它保存在安全的地方以备将来参考 2 请将本机放在通风良好, 凉爽并且干燥, 干净的地方, 至少保持其上方, 后方及两侧留出 2.5 厘米的空间, 以确保通风良好, 应远离直射阳光, 热源, 振动, 灰尘, 潮湿和或寒冷的地方 3 请将本机远离其它电子设备, 马达或变压器以避免嗡嗡声 4 请勿使本机经受于从冷到热的突然温度改变, 勿将本机放置于高湿度的环境中 ( 例如有加湿器的房间 ) 以防止本机内部发生结露, 否则可能导致触电, 火灾, 损害本机, 或人体伤害 5 请避免在外部物体可能落入本机的地方或本机可能遭遇液体滴落或飞溅的地方安装本机 在本机的顶部, 请勿放置 : - 其它组件机, 因为它们可能对本机表面造成损坏或者导致变色 - 燃烧物体 ( 例如蜡烛 ), 因为它们可能导致火灾, 对本机造成损害或造成人体伤害 - 内部装有液体的容器, 因为它们可能会摔落并且液体可能引起用户触电并且会损坏本机 6 为了不阻断热量散发, 请勿使用报纸, 桌布, 窗帘等遮盖本机 如果本机内的温度升高, 可能会引起火灾, 损坏本机或导致人体伤害 7 在所有的连接完成之前请勿将本机插头插入墙上插座 8 请勿上下倒置操作本机 它可能过热, 并极有可能导致损坏 9 请勿在开关, 旋钮或导线上用力 10 当将电源线从墙上插座断开时, 请抓住插头 ; 请勿拖拉导线 11 请勿使用化学溶剂清洁本机 ; 这可能损坏机壳涂层 请使用洁净的干布 12 只能使用本机规定的电压 在本机上使用比规定值高的电压是危险的并可能导致火灾, 损坏本机或造成人体伤害 Yamaha 将不对由于在本机上使用非规定电压而造成的任何损害负责 13 请勿尝试修改或修理本机 当需要任何维修时请联系专业 Yamaha 维修人员 不能以任何理由打开机壳 14 当准备长时间 ( 例如休假 ) 不使用本机时, 请将 AC 电源线从墙上插座断开 15 对通常的操作错误, 在断定本机出故障之前, 请务必先阅读 故障排除 一节 16 在搬动本机之前, 请按 STANDBY/ON 以将本机设置为待机模式, 并将 AC 电源插头从墙上插座断开 17 将本机靠近电源插座安装以便电源的接插 18 电池不能置于高热环境, 比如火或直射日光等 即使本机自身关闭, 只要本机还与墙上插头连接, 它就未从 AC 电源断开 此状态被称为待机模式 在此状态下, 本机被设定为仅消耗非常小量的电力 警告要减少火灾或触电的危险, 请勿将本机暴露于雨中或湿气中 注意使用此处指定外的控制或调节以及进行指定外的操作都有可能引起有害的辐射暴露 激光安全本机使用激光 因为可能会伤害眼睛, 仅可由具有资格的维修人员拆卸罩盖或试图对本装置进行维修服务 危险打开本机时, 机器会放出可见激光射线 为了避免光束直接照射到眼睛上, 在插上本机的交流电源时, 不要将眼睛对着打开的托盘或者其他打开着的装置, 并且不要往装置内部窥视 激光类型波长 输出功率 光线偏差 CAUTION-VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS. 半导体激光 GaAlAs 650 nm (DVD) 790 nm (VCD/ 音频 CD) 1.45 mw (DVD) 1.13 mw (VCD/ 音频 CD) 60 度 i Zh

48 目录 前言 3 碟片操作 18 可播放碟片格式... 3 DVD 区域编码... 3 专利信息... 4 清洁碟片... 4 提供的配件... 4 功能综述 5 前部面板... 5 前部面板显示器... 6 后部面板... 7 遥控器... 8 连接 10 连接时的注意事项 音频连接 连接立体声放大器 连接具有 6 声道 / 多声道输入的 AV 接收机 视频连接 HDMI 连接 连接电源线 开始 15 步骤 1: 安装遥控器电池 使用遥控器 步骤 2: 打开电源 步骤 3: 设置电视机类型 步骤 4: 设置语言偏好 设置 OSD (On-Screen Display) 语言 设置音频, 字幕以及碟片菜单语言 基本操作...18 暂停播放...18 选择曲目 / 章节...18 向后 / 向前搜索...19 反复播放...19 反复播放...19 反复一个片断 (DVD- 音频 /MP3/WMA/JPEG 除外 )...19 随机播放 (DVD/ 超级音频 CD 除外 )...19 编程播放 ( 音频 CD)...20 碟片菜单操作 (DVD/VCD/ 超级 VCD)...20 使用 DVD 菜单...20 使用 VCD 播放控制 (PBC) 菜单 (VCD/ 超级 VCD)...21 在屏显示 (OSD) 菜单 (DVD/VCD/ 超级 VCD/ 超级音频 CD)...21 使用 OSD 菜单 (DVD/VCD/ 超级 VCD/ 音频 CD)...21 显示文字信息 ( 超级音频 CD)...22 Picture Setting 菜单 (DVD/VCD/ 超级 VCD)...22 调节图像设置...22 图片缩放 (DVD- 视频 /VCD/ 超级 VCD/ DivX /JPEG)..23 观看角度 (DVD- 视频 )...23 音频和字幕语言 (DVD- 视频 /VCD)...24 选择音频语言...24 选择字幕语言 (DVD- 视频 )...24 DivX 外部字幕文件...24 改变页码 (DVD- 音频 )...24 组 / 文件选择 (DVD- 音频 /DivX /MP3/WMA/ Kodak picture CD)...25 选择一个组 (DVD- 音频 )...25 在文件夹中选择一个文件 (DivX /MP3/WMA/Kodak picture CD)...25 附加组播放 (DVD- 音频 )...25 改变播放区域和层 ( 超级音频 CD)...25 多媒体文件播放 (MP3/WMA/DivX /JPEG)...26 显示缩小版屏幕 (JPEG)...26 旋转图片 (JPEG)...26 中文 续 1 Zh

49 目录 设置菜单 27 语言编码清单 39 菜单概要 设置菜单操作 普通设置菜单 选择 DVD-Audio 模式 选择超级音频 CD 模式 设置 OSD 语言 父母控制的限制播放 改变密码 设置屏幕保护 设置自动电源功能 设置睡眠定时器 系统复位 显示 DivX VOD 注册码 音频设置菜单 设置模拟输出 设置数码输出 设置 LPCM 输出 设置深夜听音模式 扬声器设置菜单 设置扬声器大小 设置扬声器距离 设定扬声器水平 设置超级音频 CD 配置 视频设置菜单 设置电视机显示 设置电视机类型 选择宽屏幕格式 选择黑色水平 ( 仅限于美国和加拿大型号 ) 选择隐藏字幕 ( 仅限于美国和加拿大型号 ) 设置静止模式 选择扫描功能 切换 SCART 视频输出 ( 仅限于英国, 欧洲俄国型号 ) HDMI 设置菜单 设置 HDMI 视频 选择 DVI 输出范围 设置 HDMI 音频 DISC 设置菜单 选择缺省音频 / 字幕 /DVD 菜单语言 选择角度标志显示 选择 PBC ( 播放控制 ) 功能 设置放映一张幻灯片的持续时间 故障排除 40 术语 42 规格 44 Ô ± Ϋµ 39 ¼þ œýýš 40 þ Ô 42 ¼Ê³Ò 44 2 Zh

50 前言 前言 多谢您购买本产品 本用户手册说明使用本机的基本操作 如果没有特别说明, 本说明书中插图均以英国, 欧洲和俄国型号为例 注意事项中包含许多关于安全和操作指示的重要信息 y 指示有关您的操作的提示 本说明书是在产品生产之前印刷的 由于改进等原因, 设计和规格可能会有部分变更 如果说明书和产品存在不同, 以产品为准 可播放碟片格式 本机可以使用以下碟片 :DVD- 视频, DVD- 音频, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD+R DL, VCD, 超级 VCD, 超级音频 CD (SA-CD), 音频 CD, CD-R 和 CD- RW 注 不经过封尾处理的 CD-R(W), DVD-R(W) 和 DVD+R(W) 不能播放 版权保护的 WMA 文件不能在本机播放 本机支持大小为 2848 X 2136 像素的 JPEG 文件 因为录制条件, 比如 PC 的环境和应用程序等原因, 有些碟片可能不能播放 某些碟片的特点和条件 ; 材料, 划伤, 弯曲等可能造成播放失败 请只使用可信赖的厂家生产的 CD-R(W), DVD-R(W) 和 DVD+R(W) 碟片 不可使用任何非标准形状的碟片 ( 比如心形等 ) 不要使用粘贴有胶带, 封条或表面上有张贴物的碟片 因为这会损坏本机 不要使用贴有市售标签印刷机打印的标签的碟片 DVD 区域编码 本机支持区域码管理系统 请检查 DVD 碟片的封套确认其区域码 如果其区域码不匹配本机的区域码 ( 参见下表或本机的背面 ), 则本机不能播放该碟片 中文 目的地本机的区域码可播放碟片 美国加拿大 1 1 ALL 英国欧洲 2 2 ALL 本机可以播放 : - 录制在 CD-R(W)/DVD-R(W)/DVD+R(W) 的 MP3, WMA ( 版权保护的 WMA 除外 ) 以及图形 (Kodak, JPEG) 文件 - JPEG/ISO 9660 格式 - 最多显示 14 个字符 - CD-R(W)/DVD-R(W)/DVD+R(W) 上的 DivX 碟片 - 正式的 DivX 认证的产品 - 播放所有版本的 DivX 视频 ( 包括 DivX 6), 使用 DivX 媒体文件的标准播放 亚洲韩国 俄国 3 3 ALL 5 5 ALL 3 Zh

51 前言 - 专利信息 经 Dolby Laboratories 许可生产 Dolby 及双 D 标章是 Dolby Laboratories 的注册商标 清洁碟片 当碟片脏污, 请使用干净的软布清洁 从中央向四周擦拭 不要沿圆周方向擦拭 不要使用溶剂, 比如苯, 稀释剂, 市售的清洁液或用于模拟录音机的防静电喷雾剂等 DTS 和 DTS Digital Surround 是 DTS, Inc. 的注册商标 提供的配件 DivX, DivX Certified, 以及相关标章是 DivX, Inc. 的注册商标 请检查包装, 确认其中包括以下物品 : 遥控器 电池 (x2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) POWER DCDi 是 Faroudja 的注册商标, 它是 Genesis Microchip, Inc. 的一个部门 DIMMER GROUP HDMI AUDIO DIRECT STANDBY PAGE MULTI 2CH PROG RANDOM 音频针形缆线 REPEAT HDMI, HDMI 标记和 High Definition Multimedia Interface 是 HDMI Licensing LLC. 的注册商标 CLEAR SETUP STOP A B SLOW SEARCH PLAY PAUSE SKIP 本产品装备有版权保护技术, 该技术受若干美国专利和其他知识产权保护, 这些权利为 Macrovision Corporation 和其他权利所有者拥有 使用该拷贝保护技术必须得到 Macrovision Corporation 许可, 如果未经该公司许可, 则只能用于家庭或其他有限范围 禁止反向工程或分解 TOP MENU ON SCREEN MENU RETURN SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM 视频针形缆线 电源线 4 Zh

52 功能综述 功能综述 前部面板 1 中文 STANDBY ON HDMI AUDIO DIRECT 碟片托盘加载碟片到碟片托盘 6 打开或关闭碟片托盘 2 STANDBY/ON 打开本机或将其设置为待机模式 3 HDMI 指示器当本机检测到 HDMI 装置而且 HDMI 模式被打开时以绿色点亮 当本机未检测到 HDMI 装置而 HDMI 模式被打开时以橘黄色点亮 4 AUDIO DIRECT 指示器当您按下遥控器上的 AUDIO DIRECT 选择 AUDIO DIRECT 模式时点亮 5 前部面板显示器显示播放信息或设定 7 b/w 向后搜索 * 移动到前一章节或曲目 8 f/a 向前搜索 * 移动到后一章节或曲目 9 p/e 开始或暂停播放 0 s 停止播放 * 按住该按钮大约 2 秒钟 5 Zh

53 功能综述 前部面板显示器 SVCD WMA MP3 JPEG DVD AUDIO SA-CD DivX P.SCAN TITLE GROUP CHP/ TRK D MULTI D.MIX PROG. RANDOM ALL A B P.SCAN 指示器当启用逐行扫描功能时点亮 2 播放模式指示器为选择的播放模式显示图标 3 解码器指示器为选择的内部解码器显示图标 4 MULTI 指示器当播放多声道音源时点亮 5 D.MIX 指示器 ( 仅对于 DVD-Audio) 当播放的碟片允许将多声道音源向下混合时点亮 6 碟片指示器为碟片类型显示图标 7 信息显示器显示各种信息, 比如, 标题 / 章节 / 曲目号码, 或者播放的经过时间 y 您可以使用遥控器的 DIMMER 调节前面板显示器的亮度 6 Zh

54 功能综述 后部面板 L C L COAXIAL IN VIDEO PR / CR MAINS 中文 AV PB / CB Y R R MIXED 2CH FRONT SUBWOOFER SURROUND OUT ON OFF OPTICAL RS 232C HDMI S VIDEO COMPONENT AUDIO OUT DIGITAL REMOTE CONTROL VIDEO OUT q w ( 英国, 欧洲和俄国型号 ) 1 AUDIO OUT (6 通道独立 ) 插孔连接到您的 AV 接收机的 6 通道输入插孔 2 DIGITAL (COAXIAL) 插孔连接到您的 AV 接收机的同轴输入插孔 3 REMOTE CONTROL (IN/OUT) 连接器用于用户安装的用来传送遥控信号的电缆 4 REMOTE CONTROL (RS-232C) 端子 ( 仅限于美国, 加拿大, 英国, 欧洲和俄国型号 ) 用于商业用途的扩展端子 详情请咨询您的经销商 5 AV 端子 ( 仅限于英国, 欧洲和俄国型号 ) 连接到您的电视机的 SCART 输入端子 6 VIDEO OUT (VIDEO) 插孔连接到您的 AV 接收机的复合视频输入插孔 7 MAINS 连接附带的电源线 8 AUDIO OUT (MIXED 2CH) 插孔连接到您的 AV 接收机或立体声系统的音频输入插孔 9 DIGITAL (OPTICAL) 插孔连接到您的 AV 接收机的光学输入插孔 0 HDMI 插孔连接到您的 HDMI 装置的 HDMI 输入插孔 q VIDEO OUT (S VIDEO) 插孔连接到您的 AV 接收机的 S- 视频输入插孔 w VIDEO OUT (COMPONENT) 插孔连接到您的 AV 接收机的分量输入插孔 遥控连接器以及 RS-232C 端子 REMOTE CONTROL (IN/OUT) 连接器以及 REMOTE CONTROL (RS-232C) 端子用于用户安装 在通常使用时, 保持 RS-232C 开关设置到 OFF, 并且不要连接任何缆线到这些连接器上 注意 : 不要触及本机后面板上插孔中的针头 静电放电可能对本机造成永久损害 7 Zh

55 功能综述 遥控器 1 DIMMER 从三个亮度水平中为前面板显示器选择 : 明, 暗和自动 如果设置为自动, 亮度仅在播放时自动设置为低水平 POWER DIMMER GROUP CLEAR SETUP STOP HDMI AUDIO DIRECT STANDBY PAGE MULTI 2CH PROG RANDOM REPEAT A B SLOW SEARCH PLAY PAUSE SKIP y u i o p a s d f g h 2 HDMI 在 HDMI 分辨率设置之间切换或者关闭 HDMI 模式 ( 请参阅第 36 页 ) y 通过反复按下遥控器上的 HDMI 或使用 HDMI Video 设置单, 您可以选择 HDMI 分辨率 如果您按下遥控器上的 HDMI 一次, 当前选择的分辨率设置显示在显示器的左上角和前面板显示器上 3 GROUP 选择 DVD- 音频组 ( 请参阅第 25 页 ) 4 PAGE (+/-) 选择 DVD- 音频静止图像 ( 请参阅第 24 页 ) q w TOP MENU ON SCREEN j 5 数字按钮 (0-9) 选择当前显示的菜单中标有号码的项目 e MENU RETURN k 6 CLEAR 清除该模式或设置 ( 请参阅第 20 页 ) r t SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM l ; 7 SETUP 进入或退出本机的设置菜单 ( 请参阅第 28 页 ) 8 STOP ( 7 ) 停止播放 ( 请参阅第 18 页 ) 9 PAUSE ( 8 ) 暂停播放 ( 请参阅第 18 页 ) 逐帧播放 ( 请参阅第 18 页 ) 0 SKIP (l22 / 33l) 移动到前 / 后一章节或曲目 q TOP MENU 显示碟片的顶级菜单 y 对于具有标题菜单的碟片, 显示其标题菜单 8 Zh

56 功能综述 w 光标按钮 ( / / / ) 选择当前显示的菜单中的项目 确认菜单选择 e MENU 进入碟片菜单 ( 请参阅第 20 页 ) r SUBTITLE 选择字幕语言 ( 请参阅第 24 页 ) t AUDIO 选择音频语言或格式 ( 请参阅第 24 页 ) y POWER ( l ) 打开本机电源 ( 请参阅第 15 页 ) d A-B 反复一个指定的区间 ( 请参阅第 19 页 ) f 确认菜单选择 g SLOW / SEARCH (22 / 33) 向前或向后搜索 ( 请参阅第 19 页 ) h PLAY ( 3) 开始播放 ( 请参阅第 18 页 ) j ON SCREEN 进入或退出本机的在屏显示 (OSD) 菜单 ( 请参阅第 21 页 ) 在播放时按下两次, 进入 Picture Setting 菜单 ( 请参阅第 22 页 ) 中文 u STANDBY ( ) 将本机设置为待机模式 ( 请参阅第 15 页 ) i AUDIO DIRECT 为了改善音频质量, 在播放音频碟片时关闭视频输出 再次按下, 打开视频输出 当 HDMI 组件机被本机确认时, 该功能无效 在 AUDIO DIRECT 模式, 前面板显示器熄灭 一旦本机被关闭, 则 AUDIO DIRECT 模式被消除 ( 只有当 SA-CD 碟片播放时, 如果碟片托盘被打开 / 关闭时, 该模式被消除 ) o MULTI / 2CH 选择音响模式 : 立体声或多声道 改变超级音频 CD 播放区域 ( 请参阅第 25 页 ) k RETURN 返回到上一设置菜单 l ZOOM 放大视频图像 ( 请参阅第 23 页 ) ; ANGLE 选择 DVD 摄像机角度 ( 请参阅第 23 页 ) y 两个 按钮 (w and f) 作用相同 p PROG 进入编程设置菜单以编程碟片曲目或退出该菜单 ( 请参阅第 20 页 ) a RANDOM 以随机次序播放曲目 ( 请参阅第 19 页 ) s REPEAT 反复章节, 曲目, 标题, 组或碟片 ( 请参阅第 19 页 ) 9 Zh

57 连接 连接 连接时的注意事项 在进行连接或改变连接时, 一定要关闭本机并拔下电源线 根据您想要连接的装置的不同, 连接的方法会多种多样 以下描述的是几种可能的连接方法 为了更好地连接, 请同时参考其他装置附带的说明书 不要通过您的 VCR 连接本机 拷贝保护系统会导致视频图像变形 不要将本机的音频输出插孔连接到您的音频系统的唱机输入插孔 连接具有 6 声道 / 多声道输入的 AV 接收机 模拟连接如果您期望播放多声道超级音频 CD(SA-CD) 和 DVD- 音频, 使用市售的音频针形缆线, 连接本机的 AUDIO OUT (6 声道独立 ) 插孔到您的 AV 接收机对应的输入插孔 L C L COAXIAL IN AV 音频连接 本机具有数码同轴, 数码光纤, 独立的模拟 6 声道以及混合的模拟 2 声道输出插孔 根据您的装置上可用的输入插孔连接 R R MIXED 2CH FRONT SUBWOOFER SURROUND OPTICAL AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT ON OFF RS 232C REMOTE CONTROL HDMI 本机 ( 英国, 欧洲和俄国型号 ) 连接立体声放大器 使用附带的音频针形缆线, 连接本机的 AUDIO OUT (MIXED 2CH) 插孔到您的音频装置 ( 比如立体声放大器 ) 的对应的输入插孔 您可以在 SUBWOOFER 插孔上连接超低音扬声器 FRONT R L C SUBWOOFER SURROUND R L AV 接收机 本机 ( 英国, 欧洲和俄国型号 ) 扬声器 L C L COAXIAL IN AV R R MIXED 2CH FRONT SUBWOOFER SURROUND OPTICAL AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT ON OFF RS 232C REMOTE CONTROL HDMI 音频针形缆线 ( 附带 ) 立体声放大器 CD / DVD R L 左扬声器 右扬声器 超低音扬声器 10 Zh

58 连接 数码连接如果您期望使用您的 AV 接收机的 Dolby Digital, DTS 或 MPEG 功能, 使用市售的数码光纤或数码同轴缆线, 连接本机 DIGITAL (OPTICAL) <A> 或 DIGITAL (COAXIAL) <B> 插孔到您的 AV 接收机对应的输入插孔 视频连接 本机具有 SCART, 复合视频, S- 视频和分量视频输出端子 如果您的 AV 接收机具有视频输出插孔, 连接您的接收机, 然后连接电视机, 您的电视机就可以用于几个不同的视频源 (LD,VCR 等 ), 这只要在接收机上简单切换输入源即可 使用一个与即将连接的接收机上输入插孔对应的插孔 中文 L C L COAXIAL IN AV 本机 ( 英国, 欧洲和俄国型号 ) R R MIXED 2CH FRONT SUBWOOFER SURROUND OPTICAL AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT ON OFF RS 232C REMOTE CONTROL HDMI VIDEO PR / CR 本机 ( 英国, 欧洲和俄国型号 ) RS 232C ONTROL AV HDMI PB / CB Y S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO OUT OPTICAL IN <A> COAXIAL IN <B> 视频针形缆线 ( 附带 ) AV 接收机 <A> <B> <C> <D> 扬声器 VIDEO IN S-VIDEO IN PB/CB PR/CR Y COMPONENT VIDEO IN AV 接收机 VIDEO OUT S VIDEO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 注 VIDEO IN S VIDEO IN COMPONENT VIDEO IN 如果您连接时使用 <A> 或 <B>, 设置 [ 数字输出 ] 到 [ 全部 ] ( 请参阅第 31 页上的 设置数码输出 ) 如果数码输出的音频格式与您的接收机的能力不匹配, 接收机播放的音响会失真或者不发出声响 请务必在碟片的菜单屏幕上选择妥当的音频格式 按下遥控器的 AUDIO 一次或多次, 不但可以改变音频语言也可改变音频格式 超级音频 CD 音频信号不从 DIGITAL (COAXIAL/OPTICAL) 插孔输出 如果您期望欣赏 Dolby Digital, DTS 和 MPEG 格式, 您必须连接本机到支持这些格式的接收机 电视机 11 Zh

59 连接 复合视频插孔 <A> 连接本机的 VIDEO OUT (VIDEO) 插孔到您的 AV 接收机的视频输入端插孔, 然后使用附带的视频针形缆线, 连接接收机和电视机 S- 视频插孔 <B> S- 视频连接可以得到比复合视频更加清晰的图像, 这是因为传输视频信号时使用了分离的线路来传输亮度 (Y) 和色度 (C) 连接本机的 VIDEO OUT (S VIDEO) 插孔到您的 AV 接收机的 S- 视频输入端插孔, 然后使用市售的 S- 视频缆线, 连接接收机和电视机 HDMI 连接 HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) 使用单一连接, 提供高质量数码音频和视频 连接本机的 HDMI 插孔到您的 AV 接收机的 HDMI 输入端插孔, 然后使用市售的 HDMI 缆线, 连接接收机和电视机 如果您的接收机没有 HDMI 输出插孔, 通过直接连接本机的 HDMI 插孔到电视机的 HDMI 输入插孔, 您可以得到更好的视频图像 分量视频插孔 <C> 分量视频连接可以获得比 S- 视频连接更加逼真的色彩再现, 这是因为传输视频信号时使用了分离的线路来传输亮度 (Y: 绿 ) 和色度 (PB: 蓝,PR: 红 ) 连接本机的 VIDEO OUT (COMPONENT) 插孔到您的 AV 接收机的分量输入端插孔, 然后使用市售的分量缆线, 连接接收机和电视机 连接时请注意各个插孔的颜色 如果您的接收机没有分量输出插孔, 通过直接连接本机的分量输出插孔到电视机的分量输入插孔, 您可以得到更好的视频图像 C COAXIAL IN L L R R MIXED 2CH FRONT SUBWOOFER SURROUND OPTICAL OUT ON OFF RS 232C AUDIO OUT DIGITAL REMOTE CONTROL 本机 ( 英国, 欧洲和俄国型号 ) AV HDMI SCART 端子 <D> ( 仅限于英国, 欧洲和俄国型号 ) 如果您的电视机仅有一个视频输入端子, 您可以将电视机直接连接到本机 使用市售的 SCART 缆线, 连接本机的 AV 端子到您的电视机的 SCART 输入端子 注 请确认 SCART 缆线标有 TV 的一端连接到电视机, 标有 DVD 的一端连接到本机 S- 视频信号不在 AV 端子输出 关于 SCART 视频设置, 请参阅第 36 页 注 AV 接收机 扬声器 HDMI IN HDMI OUT HDMI IN 电视机 如果所连接的组件机不能输入音频信号, 您必须进行适当的音频连接 ( 请参阅第 10 页 ) 本机不兼容 HDCP- 兼容的 HDMI 或 DVI 组件机 当您将本机连接到 DVI 组件机时, 请使用市售的 HDMI/DVI 转换缆线 在此情形下, 您必须在该连接之外使用另一条音频连接线, 因为本机的 HDMI 插孔没有任何音频信号输出 当有数据在传送时, 不要关闭连接在本机 HDMI 插孔上的 HDMI/DVI 组件机的电源 否则会中断播放或造成噪音 y 当连接 HDMI 组件机时, 请参考该组件机的使用说明书 12 Zh

60 HDMI 视频输出本机兼容以下视频格式 : 480p/60 Hz, 576p/50 Hz, 720p/50 Hz, 60 Hz, 1080i/50 Hz, 60 Hz, 和 1080p/50 Hz, 60 Hz 注 通过反复按下遥控器上的 HDMI 或使用 HDMI Video 设置菜单 ( 请参阅第 36 页 ), 您可以选择 HDMI 分辨率设置的一种 对于某些 DVI 组件机, 图像的黑白成分可能不分明 在此情形下, 可调节所连接 DVI 组件机的图形设置 连接 HDMI 音频输出 中文 HDMI 音频设置 音频格式 模拟输出设置 自动 * 1 PCM 关 Dolby 多声道 PCM 多声道 * 2 Dolby Digital Digital 立体声 PCM 2 声道 多声道 PCM 多声道 * 2 DTS DTS DVD- 视频立体声 PCM 2 声道 MPEG 多声道 PCM 多声道 * 2 MPEG 立体声 PCM 2 声道 PCM 2 声道 * 4 多声道 / 立体声 PCM 2 声道 PCM 2 声道 多声道 PCM (PPCM) 多声道 *2,3 PCM (PPCM) 多声道 *2,3 多声道 DVD- 音频立体声 PCM (PPCM)2 声道 *3 PCM (PPCM)2 声道 *3 2 声道 *4 多声道 / 立体声 PCM (PPCM)2 声道 PCM (PPCM)2 声道 关 音频 CD/MP3/ WMA/DivX 2 声道 多声道 / 立体声 PCM 2 声道 PCM 2 声道 多声道 PCM 多声道 * 2 多声道 DTS-CD 立体声 DTS PCM 2 声道 2 声道 多声道 / 立体声 PCM 2 声道 VCD 2 声道 多声道 / 立体声 PCM 2 声道 PCM 2 声道 多声道 PCM 多声道 * 2 多声道超级 VCD 立体声 MPEG PCM 2 声道 2 声道 多声道 / 立体声 PCM 2 声道 超级音频 CD 多声道 / 2 声道 多声道 / 立体声 *1: 如果连接的 HDMI 装置不支持比特流信号 (Dolby Digital, DTS, 和 MPEG), 音频输出将自动从比特流信号转变为 PCM 信号 *2: 如果 HDMI 装置不支持多声道音频信号, 音频输出将自动从 PCM 多声道信号转变为 PCM 立体声信号和 48 khz/16 比特或更低的信号 *3: 如果音频音源被禁止向下混合, 前方左 / 右声道音频和 48 khz/16 比特或更低信号将被输出以替代向下混合立体声 *4: 如果连接的装置不支持大于 48 khz 的信号, 音频输出将被自动转变为 48 khz/16 比特或更低信号 注 您需要设置 HDMI Audio ( 请参阅第 37 页 ) 使用 HDMI 不能输出超级音频 CD 信号 进行模拟连接来听 SA-CD ( 请参阅第 10 页 ) 13 Zh

61 连接 连接电源线 所有连接完成后, 将附带的电源线插入本机的 MAINS, 然后将电源线插入交流电源插座 到交流电源插座 MAINS 14 Zh

62 开始 开始 y 如果您进行的设置不合适, 您可以复位所有的选项和个人设置到出厂设置 有关详情, 请参阅第 30 页上的 系统复位 步骤 1: 安装遥控器电池 3 使用遥控器 在本机的 6 米之内使用遥控器, 将其对准遥控传感器 中文 m 以内 1 请按部分并将电池舱盖滑开 2 装入附带的两节 (AAA, R03, UM-4) 电池, 确认与电池舱中标示的 (+/-) 一致 3 将电池舱盖滑回并直到将其卡入位 注 装入电池时要按照指示的极性标记 (+/-) 正确装入 极性装反的电池可能出现泄漏 要及时用新电池更换耗尽的电池以免出现泄漏 如果一个月以上不使用遥控器, 请从电池舱中取出电池 如果电池漏液, 请立即将其处理掉 请勿触摸泄漏的物质或让其接触到衣服等 在安装新电池之前, 请彻底清洁电池舱 新旧电池请勿混用 请勿将不同型号的电池一起使用 ( 例如碱性电池和锰电池 ) 请仔细阅读包装, 因为这些不同类型的电池可能具有相同的外形和颜色 丢弃电池时请按照当地有关规定进行 注 请勿将水或其它液体洒在遥控器上 请勿跌落遥控器 请勿将遥控器放于或储存于下列环境中 : - 高湿度的地方, 例如浴室附近 - 高温度地点, 例如加热器或炉子附近 - 温度极低的地点 - 肮脏的地方 步骤 2: 打开电源 1 确认电源线连接到交流电源插座 2 打开电视机和 AV 接收机 3 为连接在本机的 AV 接收机选择妥当的输入源 请参考 AV 接收机附带的说明书 4 按下前面板的 STANDBY/ON 或遥控器的 POWER ( l ), 打开本机 前面板显示器点亮 5 设置电视机到妥当的视频输入频道 ( 比如, EXT1/2, AV1/2, AUDIO/VIDEO 等 请参考电视机附带的说明书 ) 默认菜单屏幕出现在电视机上 15 Zh

63 开始 步骤 3: 设置电视机类型 本机兼容 NTSC 和 PAL 两种视频格式 选择与您的电视机匹配的色彩系统 y 按下 RETURN 显示前一菜单 按下 SETUP 退出设置菜单 1 按下 SETUP 设置菜单出现 SETUP GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER Move: VIDEO HDMI DISC DVD-Audio mode SA-CD mode OSD Language Parental Rating Parental Password Screen Saver Auto Power Off Sleep Timer Return Select: Enter 2 反复按下 /, 以选择 [VIDEO], 然后 按下 [VIDEO] 菜单出现 VIDEO TV Display TV Type Wide Screen Format Black Level*1 Closed Caption*1 Still Mode Component Scart Video Out*2 Move: Return 16:9 PAL Off Off Off Field Interlaced RGB Select: Enter 1/2 1/1 3 反复按下 / 以高亮度显示 [TV Type] VIDEO TV Display TV Type Wide Screen Format Black Level*1 Closed Caption*1 Still Mode Component Scart Video Out*2 Move: Return 16:9 PAL Off Off Off Field Interlaced RGB Select: Enter 4 按下 /, 以选择下列选项之一 PAL 如果连接的电视机是 PAL 制式的电视机, 选择这个 它将改变 NTSC 碟片的视频信号, 将其按 PAL 格式输出 NTSC 如果连接的电视机是 NTSC 制式的电视机, 选择这个 它将改变 PAL 碟片的视频信号, 将其按 NTSC 格式输出 MULTI 如果连接的电视机兼容 NTSC 和 PAL 格式双方 ( 比如多制式电视机 ), 选择这个 输出格式依碟片的音频格式而定 注 在改变当前电视机标准设置之前, 请确认您的电视机支持所选择的电视机类型系统 如果您使用 [PAL] 播放 NTSC 格式的碟片, 或者使用 [NTSC] 播放 PAL 格式的碟片, 视频质量会变差 当 [TV Type] 设置到 [MULTI] 时, 本机也许不经意地改变了 HDMI 分辨率 在此情形下, 请试用 [NTSC] 或 [PAL] 设置 1/1 *1: [Black Level] 和 [Closed Caption] 仅限于美国和加拿大型号 *2: [Scart Video Out] 仅限于英国, 欧洲和俄国型号 16 Zh

64 开始 步骤 4: 设置语言偏好 您可以选择自己喜欢的语言设置 只要装入碟片, 本机将自动切换到您喜欢的语言 如果您所选择的语言碟片中不存在, 则会使用碟片的默认语言 一旦选择, 系统菜单中的 OSD (On-Screen Display) 语言将保持不变 y 按下 RETURN 显示前一菜单 按下 SETUP 退出设置菜单 设置 OSD (On-Screen Display) 语言 1 按下 SETUP 设置菜单出现 2 反复按下 /, 以高亮度显示 [GENERAL], 然后按下 [GENERAL] 菜单出现 设置音频, 字幕以及碟片菜单语言 1 按下 SETUP 设置菜单出现 2 反复按下 /, 以高亮度显示 [DISC], 然后按下 [DISC] 菜单出现 碟 声音语言字幕语言 DVD 菜单语言角度显示 VCD 唱片菜单显示时间 Move: Return 英语关英语开关 3 秒 Select: Enter 1/1 中文 GENERAL DVD-Audio mode SA-CD mode OSD Language Parental Rating Parental Password Screen Saver Auto Power Off Sleep Timer Move: Return DVD-Audio SA-CD English Level On Mode 1 Off 3 反复按下 / 以高亮度显示 [OSD Language] 4 按下 /, 选择语言 Select: Enter 1/2 3 反复按下 / 以高亮度显示 [ 声音语言 ] 或 [ 字幕语言 ] 或 [DVD 菜单语言 ] 4 按下 /, 选择语言 要选择不在列表中语言 : 1 选择 [ 声音语言 ] 或 [ 字幕语言 ] 或 [DVD 菜单语言 ] 之下的 [ 其他 ] 2 按下 3 使用数字按钮 (0-9) 以键入 4 位数语言编码 ( 请参阅第 39 页上的 语言编码清单 ) 4 按下 17 Zh

65 碟片操作 碟片操作 注 如果没有特殊说明, 这里描述的所有操作使用附带的遥控器 当按下某个按钮, 如果禁止图标 ( 或 Prohibit ) 出现在电视机屏幕上, 则说明对于当前的碟片或目前状况下, 该按钮对应的功能不能使用 根据 DVD 或 VCD 碟片的不同, 某些操作也许不同或有所限制 不能给碟片托盘中推入或放入碟片以外的任何物品 这样会损坏碟片播放机 基本操作 数字按钮 (0-9) STOP ( ) PAUSE ( ) SKIP ( / ) GROUP CLEAR SETUP STOP TOP MENU PAGE PAUSE MULTI 2CH PROG RANDOM REPEAT 1 按下前面板的, 打开碟片托盘 2 在碟片托盘中放置碟片, 印刷面向上 SKIP SLOW SEARCH ON SCREEN A B PLAY SLOW/SEARCH ( / ) PLAY ( ) 3 再次按下, 关闭碟片托盘 碟片认知后, 本机自动开始播放 当碟片托盘打开后, 如果您按下 PLAY ( 3), 碟片托盘关闭, 播放自动开始 根据碟片的不同, 因为目录 / 文件结构的复杂程度, 碟片的读取时间有可能超过 30 秒钟 4 要停止播放, 按下 STOP ( 7 ) RESUME 出现在前部面板显示器中 5 要恢复播放, 按下 PLAY ( 3) 碟片从上次停止的地点开始播放 y 只要您不取出碟片, 哪怕是关闭本机电源, 您也可以恢复播放 6 要解除恢复模式, 按下 STOP ( 7 ) 两次 注 因为碟片的配置和特性以及碟片的录制条件等, 也许不能播放某些 MP3/JPEG/DivX 碟片 当您播放禁止向下混合的碟片时, NO DOWN MIX 在前面板显示器上点亮 暂停播放 1 在播放中, 按下 PAUSE ( 8 ) 播放暂停, 声音停止 2 再次按下 PAUSE ( 8 ) 选择下一个图形帧 ( 逐帧播放 ) 3 要恢复正常播放, 按下 PLAY ( 3) 选择曲目 / 章节 按下 SKIP (l22 / 33l) 或使用数字按钮 (0-9) 和, 选择曲目 / 章节号码 您可以按下 SKIP (l22 ) 一次, 移动到当前曲目 / 章节的开头 ; 也可以按下 SKIP (l22 ) 两次, 移动到前一曲目 在反复播放曲目 / 章节时, 按下 SKIP (l22 / 33l) 重新播放该曲目 / 章节 18 Zh

66 碟片操作 向后 / 向前搜索 1 按下 SLOW / SEARCH (22 / 33) 为了慢速搜索, 在按下 SLOW / SEARCH (22 / 33) 之前, 按下 PAUSE ( 8 ) 暂停播放 2 在搜索时, 反复按下 SLOW / SEARCH (22 / 33), 选择期望的速度 3 要恢复正常播放, 按下 PLAY ( 3) 注 对于 WMA,DTS-CD 和 JPEG, 搜索功能 ( 向后, 向前和慢速搜索 ) 无效 对于 MP3, 慢速搜索无效 对于 VCD, SVCD 以及 DivX, 慢速向后搜索功能无效 反复播放 您可以反复播放单个章节 / 曲目, 单个标题 / 组或者整个碟片 此外, 您还可以设定两个点 ( 起点和终点 ), 反复播放指定的一段 CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH REPEAT A B REPEAT A-B MP3, WMA, JPEG, DivX Chapter: 反复当前的章节 Title: 反复当前的标题 Track: 反复当前的曲目 Group: 反复当前的组 Folder: 反复当前的文件夹 All*: 反复整个碟片 OFF: 退出反复模式 *: 有些碟片可能没有此功能 注 OFF Track Folder 对于 VCD 和超级 VCD, 当 PBC 模式被选择时, 反复播放不能进行 反复一个片断 (DVD- 音频 /MP3/WMA/JPEG 除外 ) 1 在播放时, 在期望的开始点按下 A-B All 2 在您期望的结束点, 再次按下 A-B 选择的片断被反复播放 3 退出序列时, 请按下 A-B 中文 反复播放 按下 REPEAT, 选择反复模式 每按下该按钮一次, 电视机屏幕的显示按以下次序变化 : DVD- 视频 DVD- 音频 Chapter Track OFF OFF Title Group 音频 CD, 超级音频 CD, VCD, 超级 VCD Track OFF All 随机播放 (DVD/ 超级音频 CD 除外 ) 您可以随机顺序播放曲目 PROG RANDOM REPEAT RANDOM 1 在播放中, 按下 RANDOM RANDOM 出现在前面板显示器上, 所有曲目以随机顺序播放 2 要恢复正常播放, 再次按下 RANDOM 19 Zh

67 碟片操作 编程播放 ( 音频 CD) 您可以将保存在碟片中的曲目按自己期望的顺序播放 本机可编程的最大曲目数目为 20 数字按钮 (0-9) CLEAR STOP ( ) GROUP CLEAR SETUP STOP TOP MENU PAGE PAUSE SKIP SLOW SEARCH ON SCREEN MULTI 2CH PROG RANDOM REPEAT A B PLAY PROG 碟片菜单操作 (DVD/VCD/ 超级 VCD) 许多 DVD,VCD ( 仅限于 2.0 版本 ) 碟片,SVCD 碟片包含自己固有的引导菜单, 分别称为 DVD 菜单 和 VCD 播放控制菜单 这样的菜单为操作碟片提供了很多方便 数字按钮 (0-9) GROUP CLEAR SETUP STOP PAGE PAUSE SLOW SEARCH MULTI 2CH PROG RANDOM REPEAT A B PLAY / / / SKIP SKIP ( / ) MENU RETURN RETURN TOP MENU ON SCREEN 1 如果需要可按下 STOP ( 7 ), 停止播放 2 按下 PROG 编程设置菜单出现在电视机屏幕上 3 使用数字按钮 (0-9) 键入您期望编程播放的曲 目号码 4 按下 移动到下一个域 5 反复步骤 3-4, 直到您输入了所有期望的曲 目 6 使用 / / / 选择 [Play Program], 然后按下 开始编程播放 要删除选择的曲目号码 按下 CLEAR 要删除清单 使用 / / / 选择 [Clear All], 然后按下 注一旦您从碟片托盘中取出碟片或者关闭本机, 保存的编程播放内容将被清除 MENU 使用 DVD 菜单 1 按下 MENU DVD 菜单出现在电视机屏幕上 对于某些碟片, 只要装入碟片,DVD 菜单就会显示出来 2 使用 / / / 或数字按钮 (0-9), 选择播放特性或项目 3 按下 开始播放 要退出菜单 按下 MENU MENU RETURN / / / RETURN 20 Zh

68 碟片操作 使用 VCD 播放控制 (PBC) 菜单 (VCD/ 超级 VCD) 1 按下 MENU, 打开 PBC 功能 碟片菜单出现在电视机屏幕上 对于某些碟片, 只要装入碟片, 碟片菜单就会显示出来 2 使用 SKIP (l22 / 33l) 或数字按钮 (0-9) 选择播放选项 3 在播放中, 按下 RETURN 可返回菜单屏幕 要跳越索引菜单从碟片的开头播放 按下 MENU, 关闭 PBC 功能 y 您也可使用设置菜单打开或关闭播放控制 (PBC) 功能 ( 请参阅第 38 页上的 选择 PBC ( 播放控制 ) 功能 ) 在屏显示 (OSD) 菜单 (DVD/VCD/ 超级 VCD/ 超级音频 CD) OSD 菜单显示碟片播放信息 ( 比如, 标题或章节号码, 经过时间或音频 / 字幕语言 ) 在不干扰碟片播放的同时, 可以进行一些操作 使用 OSD 菜单 (DVD/VCD/ 超级 VCD/ 音频 CD) 在播放中, 按下 ON SCREEN 电视机屏幕上出现碟片的信息清单 DVD- 视频 0 DVD- 音频 0 DVD VIDEO 00 : 00 : 10 Title 1 / 1 Audio 1 / 1 1 Chapter 1 / 7 Time 00 : 00 : 10 MPEG 5.1 Ch Subtitle 1 / 1 Bitrate Mbps Angle 1 / 1 02 : 15 : DVD AUDIO 00 : 00 : : 15 : 30 Group 1 / 1 Track 1 / 8 Time 00 : 00 : 10 Audio 1 / 1 MLP 5.1 Ch 96 k / 24 bit Subtitle 1 / 1 Angle 1 / 1 Page 1 / q 中文 GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH VCD/ 超级 VCD/ 音频 CD PROG 2 w 数字按钮 (0-9) RANDOM REPEAT VCD Track 1 / 7 00 : 00 : 10 A B CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH Time Track Elapsed STOP PAUSE PLAY e SKIP MENU TOP MENU ON SCREEN RETURN ON SCREEN / / / 1: 当前标题或组号码 / 标题或组的总数目 2: 当前章节或曲目号码 / 章节或曲目的总数目 3: 经过时间 4: 时间剩余 5: 经过时间 ( 您可以输入数字来进行时间搜索 ) 6: 音频信息 7: 当前角度号码 / 角度的总数目 8: 当前字幕号码 / 字幕语言的总数目 9: 数据传输速度 0: 当前音频号码 / 音频语言的总数目 q: 当前页码 / 页码的总数目 w: 时间 ( 您可以选择时间的类别 ) e: 在 w 显示的时间的类别 21 Zh

69 碟片操作 要选择一个标题 (DVD-Video)/ 组 (DVD- 音频 ) 1 反复按下 / / / 以高亮度显示 1, 然后使用数字按钮 (0-9) 键入标题 / 组号码 2 按下 要选择一个章节 (DVD- 视频 )/ 曲目 (VCD/ 超级 VCD/DVD- 音频 ) 1 反复按下 / / / 以高亮度显示 2, 然后使用数字按钮 (0-9) 键入章节 / 曲目号码 2 按下 要搜索一个时间 1 反复按下 / / / 以高亮度显示 5, 然后使用数字按钮 (0-9) 从左到右键入小时, 分, 秒 2 按下 注 在搜索时间时, 如果您键入的时间超出了当前播放的组 / 曲目的总时间, 禁止图标 ( ) 会显示出来 要选择一个角度 / 字幕 / 音频 1 反复按下 / / / 以高亮度显示 7, 8 或 0, 然后使用数字按钮 (0-9) 键入角度, 字幕或音频的号码 2 按下 注 如果正在播放的碟片不具有相应的功能, 则您无法改变 [Angle]/[Subtitle]/[Audio] 设置 要选择一个页码 (DVD- 音频 ) 1 反复按下 / / / 以高亮度显示 q, 然后使用数字按钮 (0-9) 键入页码号码 2 按下 要选择一个时间类别 (VCD/ 超级 VCD/ 音频 CD) 反复按下 / / /, 以高亮度显示 w, 然后按下 以切换时间类别 要退出 OSD 菜单 按下 ON SCREEN 显示文字信息 ( 超级音频 CD) 某些超级音频 CD 碟片包含文字信息 ( 比如, 曲目名称, 曲目集名称, 艺术家名称等 ) 如果碟片具有超级音频 CD 文字, 当装入碟片时, 曲目名称在电视机屏幕上自动显示出来 要显示曲目集 / 艺术家名称 在播放中, 按下 ON SCREEN 画面设置菜单 (DVD/VCD/ 超级 VCD) 本机具有 10 种您可以自行定义的图像色彩设置组合 调节图像设置 1 在播放时按下 ON SCREEN 两次 画面设置菜单出现在电视机屏幕上 2 按下 / 高亮显示期望的参数, 再按下 / 调节参数 画面设置 亮度 Move: Adjust : 3 按下 ON SCREEN 退出设置菜单 您可以调节下列参数 01/09 亮度设置该项以调节图像的整体亮度 对比度设置该项以调节图像的明亮区域 ( 白色水平 ) 色调设置该项以调节图像的色调或相位 0 22 Zh

70 碟片操作 中等清晰度设置该项以调节中频图像的清晰度 高清晰度设置该项以调节高频图像的清晰度 DNR 设置该项以减小视频噪音 微调设置该项以非线性调节图像的亮度 色度设置该项以调节色彩的密度 色度延迟设置该项以调节色度信号的预先延迟, 获得完美清晰图像 True Life 设置该项以调节图像细部的亮度 正值能够让您再现视频源的微小信号 该功能仅限于逐行扫描 ( 使用分量视频插孔 ) 和 HDMI 输出 根据连接和设置, 图像设置的有效性不同 HDMI 逐行扫描 ( 分量视频 ) 隔行扫描 ( 分量视频 ) 亮度 0 到 +6 0 到 +6 0 到 +6 对比度 -6 到 +6-6 到 +6-6 到 +6 色调 -6 到 +6-6 到 +6-6 到 +6 ( 仅限于 S- 视 频和 CVBS) 中等清晰度 无效 -6 到 +6-6 到 +6 高清晰度无效 -6 到 +6-6 到 +6 DNR 0 到 +6 0 到 +6 0 到 +6 微调 无效 -6 到 +6-6 到 +6 色度 -6 到 +6-6 到 +6-6 到 +6 色度延迟 无效 -2 到 +2-2 到 +2 True Life 0 到 +6 0 到 +6 无效 注对于 CVBS ( 复合视频 ) 和 S- 视频输出, 有些图像设置无效 图片缩放 (DVD- 视频 /VCD/ 超级 VCD/ DivX /JPEG) 您可以将图像在电视机屏幕上放大, 且可以移动放大的图像 1 在播放时, 反复按下 ZOOM, 以不同的比率显示图片 ( 缩放 150%, 200%, 300%, 或 400%) 2 按下 / / / 移动放大的图像 3 反复按下 ZOOM 返回到原来的大小 观看角度 (DVD- 视频 ) 如果碟片中包含从不同的摄影机角度录制的内容, 您可以从不同的角度观看图像 注 MENU TOP MENU ON SCREEN SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM RETURN 对于各个碟片可用的观察角度不一定相同 请参考 DVD 菜单的操作说明或碟片的封套 反复按下 ANGLE, 选择期望的角度 / / / ZOOM ANGLE 中文 23 Zh

71 碟片操作 音频和字幕语言 (DVD- 视频 /VCD) 如果碟片包含多种语言选项, 您可以选择音频 / 字幕语言 注 对于各个碟片可用的语言不一定相同 请参考菜单的操作说明或碟片的封套 y 您可以在设置菜单 ( 请参阅第 17 页上的 设置音频, 字幕以及碟片菜单语言 ) 中设置默认的音频 / 字幕语言 SUBTITLE AUDIO 选择音频语言 反复按下 AUDIO, 以选择音频语言 注 对于 VCD, 仅当 [ 模拟输出 ] 被设置为 [ 立体模式 ] 时, 该功能有效 ( 请参阅第 31 页上的 设置模拟输出 ) 选择字幕语言 (DVD- 视频 ) SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM 反复按下 SUBTITLE, 以选择字幕语言 DivX 外部字幕文件 以下列出的字体可以用于 DivX 外部字幕文件 要使用期望的字体观看 DivX 碟片时, 必须在设置菜单中将默认字幕语言设置为期望的语言 ( 请参阅第 17 页上的 设置音频, 字幕以及碟片菜单语言 ) 本机支持以下语言 : 阿尔巴尼亚, 布里多尼, 保加利亚, 白俄罗斯, 加泰罗, 克罗地亚, 捷克, 丹麦, 荷兰, 英, 法罗, 芬兰, 法, 德, 匈牙利, 冰岛, 爱尔兰, 意大利, 库尔德 ( 拉丁 ), 马其顿, 希腊, 希伯来, 摩尔达维亚, 挪威, 波兰, 葡萄牙, 罗马尼亚, 俄, 塞尔维亚, 斯洛伐克, 斯洛文尼亚, 西班牙, 瑞典, 土耳其, 乌克兰 注 根据碟片特性或录制条件, 有些碟片可能无法播放 有些外部字幕文件也许不能正确显示或完全无法显示 对于外部字幕文件, 以下的扩展名可以接受 ( 注意, 这些文件在碟片的导航菜单上不会显示 ):.srt,.sub,.ssa,.smi,.ass,.txt,.psb,.sami 电影文件的文件名必须与外部字幕文件的文件名相同 对于一个电影文件, 只能装入一个外部字幕文件 改变页码 (DVD- 音频 ) 许多 DVD-Audio 碟片具有幻灯播放和翻页功能 如果碟片具有相应的信息, 您可以显示照片库的信息页码, 艺术家简历, 歌词等 反复按下 PAGE (+/-) 移动到下 / 上一页码 PAGE (+/ ) DIMMER GROUP HDMI AUDIO DIRECT STANDBY PAGE MULTI 2CH PROG 24 Zh

72 碟片操作 组 / 文件选择 (DVD- 音频 / DivX /MP3/WMA/Kodak picture CD) 您可以在 DVD-Audio 碟片中选择一个特定的组, 或者在数据碟片中选择一个曲目 / 文件 GROUP GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH PROG 附加组播放 (DVD- 音频 ) 某些 DVD-Audio 碟片包含附加组, 播放时需要 4 位数的密码 在此情形下, 请参考碟片的封套和其他附带信息 GROUP GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH PROG 中文 数字按钮 (0-9) RANDOM REPEAT 数字按钮 (0-9) RANDOM REPEAT CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH A B CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH A B STOP PAUSE PLAY STOP PAUSE PLAY SKIP SKIP TOP MENU ON SCREEN TOP MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN MENU RETURN / MENU RETURN / 选择一个组 (DVD- 音频 ) 1 按下 GROUP 电视机屏幕上出现组图标 1 按下 GROUP 电视机屏幕上出现组图标 DVD AUDIO Group 01 / 08 DVD AUDIO Move: Select: Enter Group Move: 01 / 08 Select: Enter 2 使用 / 或数字按钮 (0-9) 选择组号 码 3 按下 在文件夹中选择一个文件 (DivX /MP3/WMA/Kodak picture CD) 1 按下 / 选择一个文件夹, 然后按下 打开文件夹 2 按下 / 按钮, 选择一个文件, 然后按下 从选择的文件开始播放 如果您使用数字按钮 (0-9) 来选择文件, 从选择的那个文件自动开始播放 2 使用 / 或数字按钮 (0-9) 选择附加 组号码, 然后按下 3 使用数字按钮 (0-9) 键入 4 位数密码, 然后按 下 4 反复按下 /, 选择一个曲目, 然后按 下 改变播放区域和层 ( 超级音频 CD) 有 3 种类型的超级音频 CD 碟片 : 单层, 双层, 混合 各种类型可能包含最多两个录制信息区域 : 高质量立体声区域和高质量多声道区域 您可以在超级音频 CD 多声道和超级音频 CD 立体声区域之间切换 y 使用设置菜单, 您也可以改变模拟输出设置 ( 请参阅第 31 页上的 设置模拟输出 ) 25 Zh

73 碟片操作 GROUP MULTI 2CH PAGE Media Player MULTI /2CH Time 00 : 00 : 10 PROG ROOT RANDOM SCRNE JPEG REPEAT A B CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH STOP STOP (.. 0 JPG A_0510 JPG B_0618 JPG B_0630 JPG C_ JPG C_ PLAY PAUSE ) Move : Select : Enter 2 按下 / 选择一个文件夹 然后按下 打开文件夹 1 按下 STOP ( 7 ) 停止播放 2 按下 MULTI / 2CH 当多声道区域被选择时 MULTI 点亮 要移动到上层的文件夹 当碟片播放停止时选 择具有两点的文件夹图标 3 按下 多媒体文件播放 (MP3/WMA/DivX /JPEG) / 按钮 选择一个文件 然后 按 下 从选择的文件开始播放 如果您使用数字按钮 (0-9) 来选择文件 从选 择的那个文件自动开始播放 您可以播放在私人录制的 CD-R/RW 碟片或市贩的 CD 上的 MP3 WMA DivX 和 JPEG 文件 注 显示缩小版屏幕 JPEG 根据碟片特性或录制条件 有些文件可能无法播放 本机支持大小为 2848 X 2136 像素的 JPEG 文件 但是 根 据图像的宽高比不同 一些文件也许无法正确显示 1 在播放时按下 MENU 小图标出现在电视机屏幕上 y 您可以为幻灯演示的各个图片设置停留时间 ( 请参阅第 38 页上的 设置放映一张幻灯片的持续时间 ) PROG 数字按钮 (0-9) RANDOM REPEAT A B CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH STOP STOP ( 2 按下 SKIP (l22 / 33l) 显示前 / 后一页的其他 PLAY PAUSE ) 图片 SKIP TOP MENU SKIP ( / ) ON SCREEN / / MENU / RETURN MENU 1 加载碟片到碟片托盘 播放自动开始 对于 MP3 和 WMA 碟片数据菜单在电视屏幕上 显示 对于 DivX 和 JPEG 在播放时按下 STOP ( 7 ) 以显示碟片数据菜单 26 Zh 3 按下 / / / 以高亮度显示图像 之一 然后按下 开始播放 4 按下 STOP ( 7 ) 返回数据碟片的菜单 旋转图片 (JPEG) 在播放中 按下 / 机屏幕上旋转图像 / : 反时针方向旋转图片 90 度 : 顺时针方向旋转图片 90 度, : 旋转图片 180 度 / 在电视

74 设置菜单 设置菜单 菜单概要 y 每个参数的初始设置以粗体表示 如果您进行的设置不合适, 您可以复位所有的选项和个人设置到出厂设置 有关详情, 请参阅第 30 页上的 系统复位 中文 主菜单菜单项目设置项目 / 子菜单设置项目 / 参数 GENERAL DVD- 音频模式 DVD 音频, DVD- 视频 SA-CD 模式 语言菜单 SA-CD, CD 亚洲型号 : English, 间体中文韩国型号 : English, 家长设置级别 ( 键入您的密码 ) 水准 / 级别 1 到水准 / 级别 8 更换密码 ( 键入您的密码 ) 输入新密码, 确认密码 屏幕保护 自动关机 保存模式 开, 关 模式 1, 模式 2, 关 关, 30 分, 60 分, 90 分,120 分,150 分 工厂初始化 ( 键入您的密码 ) 是, 否 DivX 登入号码 (DivX 注册密码被显示 ) Enter AUDIO 模拟输出立体模式, 多模式 数字输出 LPCM 输出 深夜听取模式 全部, 脉冲编码调治, 关 48KHz, 96KHz 开, 关 SPEAKER 尺寸前置音箱 (L/R) 大, 小 中置音箱 (C), 后置音箱 (SL/SR) 重低音音箱 初始化 大, 小, 关 开, 关 开, 关 距离设置单位英尺, 米 前置音箱 (L/R), 中置音箱 (C), 后置音箱 (SL/ SR) 0.3 米到 12.0 米 (1 英尺到 40 英尺 ) 缺省设置 : 3.0 米 (10 英尺 ) 电平设置 初始化左前置音箱 (L), 中置音箱 (C), 右前置音箱 (R), 左后置音箱 (SL), 右后置音箱 (SR), 重低音音箱 开, 关 0 分贝到 -12 分贝 检测音调 关, 手册, 自动 初始化 开, 关 SA-CD 超级音频激光唱盘配置 配置 1, 配置 2, 配置 3 取舍频率 60, 80, 100, 120 VIDEO TV 显示 16:9, 4:3 Pan Scan, 4:3 Letter Box TV 类型 亚洲型号 : 多, NTSC, PAL 韩国型号 : 多, NTSC, PAL 宽频格式 伸展, 邮箱, 关 黑色水平 ( 仅限于美国和 开, 关 加拿大型号 ) 关闭字模 ( 仅限于美国和 开, 关 加拿大型号 ) 静止模式 帧扫描, 场扫描 三色视频 前进, 交错 SCART 视频输出 ( 仅限于英国, 欧洲和俄国型号 ) CVBS, 三原色 ( 红 / 绿 / 蓝 ) HDMI HDMI 音频设置 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 自动 DVI 输出范围 标准, 增强 HDMI 音频设置 自动, 脉冲编码调治, 关 DISC 声音语言 关 ( 仅限于 [ 字幕语言 ]), 英语, 法语, 西班牙语, 字幕语言 DVD 菜单语言角度显示 日语, 德语, 意大利语, 俄语, 其他开, 关 VCD 唱片菜单 开, 关 显示时间 2 秒到 10 秒, 缺省设置 : 3 秒 27 Zh

75 设置菜单 设置菜单操作 设置在电视屏幕上进行, 您可对本机进行用户定做, 使其满足您的特别需要 按照以下步骤开始设置菜单的操作 CLEAR REPEAT A B 2 反复按下 /, 选择期望的主菜单, 然后按下 菜单项目和设置项目出现 扬声器 尺寸距离设置电平设置 SA-CD 1/1 SETUP SETUP STOP SLOW SEARCH PAUSE PLAY SKIP Move: Return Select: Enter TOP MENU ON SCREEN / / / MENU RETURN RETURN 3 按下 /, 以高亮度显示期望的菜单项 目 如果选择的菜单项目具有子菜单, 仅在设置项 目的一侧出现右箭头 在此情形下, 按下, 然后反复步骤 3 扬声器 1/1 SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM 超级音频激光唱盘配置取舍频率 配置 y 按下 RETURN 显示前一菜单 按下 SETUP 退出设置菜单 有些菜单需要特殊操作, 详情可参考以下页码 Move: Return Select: Enter 1 按下 SETUP 主菜单和菜单项目出现在您的电视机上 如果选择的菜单项目只有设置项目, 设置项目的左右出现左右箭头 设置 1/2 音频 1/1 GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER VIDEO HDMI DISC DVD- 音频模式 SA-CD 模式语言菜单家长设置级别更换密码屏幕保护自动关机保存模式 模拟输出数字输出 LPCM 输出深夜听取模式 立体模式脉冲编码调治 96KHz 关 Move: Return Select: Enter Move: Return Select: Enter 4 按下 / 切换设置菜单或调节参数 28 Zh

76 设置菜单 普通设置菜单 注 选择 DVD-Audio 模式 有些 DVD-Audio 碟片除了 DVD-Audio 内容外还包含 DVD-Video 内容 您可以选择 DVD-Audio 或 DVD- Video 模式 在 [GENERAL] 菜单中选择 [DVD- 音频模式 ] DVD 音频选择此项可播放 DVD-Audio 和 DVD-Video 两方面的内容 但有些碟片只能播放 DVD-Audio DVD- 视频选择此项仅播放 DVD-Audio 内容 注 设置 GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER Move: VIDEO HDMI DISC DVD- 音频模式 SA-CD 模式语言菜单家长设置级别更换密码屏幕保护自动关机保存模式 Return Select: Enter 1/2 只有当碟片托盘中没有装入碟片时, 该设置才有效 所选择的模式在您关闭设置菜单后生效 y 当 DVD- 音频碟片播放时, DVD AUDIO 指示器点亮 当您选择 [DVD- 视频 ] 时,DVD AUDIO 指示器熄灭 只有当碟片托盘中没有装入碟片时, 该设置才有效 所选择的模式在您关闭设置菜单后生效 当您选择 [CD] 时, 本机不播放没有 CD 层的 SA-CD 碟片 设置 OSD 语言 本菜单包含各种在屏幕显示 (OSD) 语言的选项 关于详情, 第 17 页上的 设置 OSD (On-Screen Display) 语言 父母控制的限制播放 某些 DVD 的父母控制水平针对整个碟片, 而有些则针对某些场景 利用这些功能您可以设置播放限制水平 限制水平从 1 到 8, 且根据国家而变 您可以限制一些对小孩不宜的碟片, 也可以在某些碟片中使其播放替代的场景 1 在 [GENERAL] 菜单中选择 [ 家长设置级别 ] 2 使用数字按钮 (0-9) 键入 4 位数密码 ( 有关密码的详情, 参看 改变密码, 如下 ) 如果密码正确, [ 家长设置级别 ] 可以使用并选择 3 按下 / 选择限制水平 要取消父母控制, 使得所有碟片可以播放, 选择 [ 水准 / 级别 8] 注 VCD, SVCD, CD 和 SA-CD 没有水平指示器, 因而父母控制水平对这类碟片无效 有些 DVD 碟片的封套上标注有限制水平, 但碟片中实际上并没有植入限制水平密码 限制水平功能对这样碟片的播放无效 中文 选择超级音频 CD 模式 某些超级音频 CD 碟片既包含超级音频 CD 层又有标准 CD 层 您可选择超级音频 CD 或 CD 模式 在 [GENERAL] 菜单中选择 [SA-CD 模式 ] SA-CD 选择此项可播放 SA-CD 层 CD 选择此项可播放 CD 层 改变密码 您可以改变父母控制使用的密码 当屏幕上有指示时, 键入 4 位密码 默认的密码是 在 [GENERAL] 菜单中选择 [ 更换密码 ] 29 Zh

77 设置菜单 2 使用数字按钮 (0-9) 键入旧的 4 位数密码 如果是第一次, 请键入 2580 如果密码正确, 出现子菜单 3 使用数字按钮 (0-9) 键入新的 4 位数密码 [ 确认密码 ] 被高亮度显示 4 请键入新的 4 位数密码 前一菜单出现, 新的 4 位数密码生效 设置屏幕保护 您可以打开或关闭屏幕保护 在 [GENERAL] 菜单中选择 [ 屏幕保护 ] 开选择此项可以在碟片停止播放 15 分钟后打开屏幕保护 关选择此项可取消屏幕保护功能 设置自动电源功能 您可以设置自动待机模式 在 [GENERAL] 菜单中选择 [ 自动关机 ] 模式 1 选择此项可以在碟片停止播放 30 分钟后, 或者碟片播放连续 6 小时后而没有任何操作时, 使得本机自动进入待机模式 模式 2 选择此项可以在碟片停止播放 30 分钟后使得本机自动进入待机模式 关选择此项可取消电源自动关闭功能 设置睡眠定时器 您可以设置本机在一定时间后自动进入待机模式 在 [GENERAL] 菜单中选择 [ 保存模式 ] 30 分, 60 分, 90 分, 120 分, 150 分选择其中之一设置睡眠定时器 关选择此项取消睡眠定时器 系统复位 您可以复位所有的选项和个人设置返回到出厂设置, 但是 [ 家长设置级别 ] 和 [ 更换密码 ] 除外 1 在 [GENERAL] 菜单中选择 [ 工厂初始化 ] 2 使用数字按钮 (0-9) 键入 4 位数密码 ( 有关密码的详情, 请参阅第 29 页上的 改变密码 ) 确认画面出现 3 反复按下 /, 选择 [ 是 ] 进行系统复位, 然后按下 所有设置返回到出厂的默认值 显示 DivX VOD 注册码 Yamaha 提供 DivX VOD (Video On Demand) 注册码, 它可以帮助您通过 DivX VOD 服务购买或租赁视频产品 有关详情, 请访问 1 在 [GENERAL] 菜单中选择 [DivX 登入号码 ] 2 按下 注册码出现 3 按下 返回前一菜单 y 要从 的 DivX VOD 服务购买或租赁视频商品时, 使用注册密码然后下载视频内容到 CD-R 以便在本机播放 注 常规设置 工厂初始化 DivX 登入号码 Move: 工厂初始化 确认 ( 是 ) 实行. 是 Return.... Select: Enter 所有从 DivX VOD 下载的视频只能在本机播放 在 DivX 影片播放时, 不能使用时间搜索功能 否 2/2 30 Zh

78 设置菜单 音频设置菜单 设置 LPCM 输出 设置 1/1 如果您在数码端子, 比如同轴或光学端子上连接了 PCM 兼容的接收机, 可设置 LPCM 输出 碟片按一定的取样率录制 取样率越高, 音质越好 GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER VIDEO HDMI DISC Move: 模拟输出数字输出 LPCM 输出深夜听取模式 Return Select: Enter 在 [AUDIO] 菜单中选择 [LPCM 输出 ] 48KHz 设置此项可播放取样率 48 khz 录制的碟片 所有 96 khz PCM 数据流 ( 如果有 ) 均被转换为 48 khz 取样率 96KHz 设置此项可播放取样率 96 khz 录制的碟片 如果 96 khz 碟片受到拷贝保护, 数码输出被自动转换为 48 khz 取样率 中文 设置模拟输出 设置模拟输出使其与本机的能力匹配 在 [AUDIO] 菜单中选择 [ 模拟输出 ] 立体模式选择此项来改变声道输出为立体声, 即, 仅从两前方扬声器输出音响 多模式选择此项可以使用具有 6 声道输入接收机的多声道音频 ( 视频 ) 在此模式下, 本机根据需要可进行 DTS 或 Dolby Digital 5.1 声道解码 设置数码输出 根据您选择的音频装置的连接, 设置数码输出 在 [AUDIO] 菜单中选择 [ 数字输出 ] 设置深夜听音模式 在此模式, 高音量输出被柔和处理, 低音量输出被提高到可以听到的水平 在夜间观看您所喜欢的动作片, 为了不干扰别人, 这很有用 在 [AUDIO] 菜单中选择 [ 深夜听取模式 ] 开选择此项可拉平音量 此功能仅限于 Dolby Digital 模式的电影 关当您期望欣赏全范围的环绕声音响时, 选择此项 注 该模式仅对模拟输出有效 全部选择此项当您连接了数码音频输出插孔到多声道解码器 / 接收机 脉冲编码调治仅当您的接收机不能解码多声道音频信号时选择此项 关选择此项以关闭数码输出 31 Zh

79 设置菜单 扬声器设置菜单 设置 GENERAL 尺寸 AUDIO 距离设置电平设置 SPEAKER SA-CD VIDEO HDMI DISC Move: Return Select: Enter 1/1 初始化您可以将 [ 尺寸 ] 设置复位到出厂的默认值 1 在 [SPEAKER] 菜单的 [ 尺寸 ] 中选择 [ 初始化 ] 2 按下 确认画面出现 3 选择 [ 是 ] 复位设置, 然后按下 [ 尺寸 ] 设置返回到出厂的默认值 设置扬声器距离 您可以设置单个扬声器的距离 在 5.1 声道系统中, 除超低音扬声器之外的其他扬声器与听音位置距离相等是一种理想状态 在 [SPEAKER] 菜单中选择 [ 距离设置 ] 设置扬声器大小 您可以设置单个扬声器的大小 在 [SPEAKER] 菜单中选择 [ 尺寸 ] 前置音箱 (L/R) 设置前方左 / 右扬声器的大小 大如果连接的是大扬声器, 选择此项 小如果连接的是小扬声器, 选择此项 中置音箱 (C), 后置音箱 (SL/SR) 设置中央 / 环绕声左 / 右扬声器的大小 大如果连接的是大扬声器, 选择此项 小如果连接的是小扬声器, 选择此项 关如果没有连接中央 / 环绕声左 / 右扬声器, 选择此项 重低音音箱选择超低音扬声器打开或关闭 开如果连接有超低音扬声器, 选择此项 关如果没有连接超低音扬声器, 选择此项 注 单位您可以选择显示使用的计量单位 英尺选择此项, 以英尺为单位输入扬声器距离 米选择此项, 以米为单位输入扬声器距离 前置音箱 (L/R) 设置从听音位置到前方扬声器的距离 我们建议前方左扬声器和前方右扬声器要放置在距离听音位置相同距离的地方 中置音箱 (C) 设置从听音位置到中央扬声器的距离 后置音箱 (SL/SR) 设置从听音位置到环绕声扬声器的距离 我们建议环绕声左扬声器和右扬声器要放置在距离听音位置相同距离的地方 控制范围 :0.3 米到 12.0 米 (1 英尺到 40 英尺 ) 控制步距 :0.3 米 (1 英尺 ) 注 对于 [ 中置音箱 (C)] 的设置, 您不能指定超过 [ 前置音箱 (L/R)] 设置或不足 [ 前置音箱 (L/R)] 设置减去 1.5 米 (5 英尺 ) 对于 [ 后置音箱 (SL/SR)] 的设置, 您不能指定超过 [ 前置音箱 (L/R)] 设置或不足 [ 前置音箱 (L/R)] 设置减去 4.5 米 (15 英尺 ) 这些设置对超级音频 CD 碟片不适合 关于超级音频 CD 设置, 请参阅第 33 页上的 设置超级音频 CD 配置 当 [ 模拟输出 ] 设置被设置到 [ 立体模式 ] 时 ( 请参阅第 31 页上的 设置模拟输出 ),[ 中置音箱 (C)], [ 后置音箱 (SL/SR)] 和 [ 重低音音箱 ] 设置不起作用 32 Zh

80 设置菜单 初始化您可以将 [ 距离设置 ] 设置复位到出厂的默认值 1 在 [SPEAKER] 菜单的 [ 距离设置 ] 中选择 [ 初始化 ] 2 按下 确认画面出现 3 选择 [ 是 ] 复位设置, 然后按下 [ 距离 ] 设置返回到出厂的默认值 初始化您可以将 [ 电平设置 ] 设置复位到出厂的默认值 1 在 [SPEAKER] 菜单的 [ 电平设置 ] 中选择 [ 初始化 ] 2 按下 确认画面出现 3 选择 [ 是 ] 复位设置, 然后按下 [ 电平 ] 设置返回到出厂的默认值 中文 设定扬声器水平 您可以设置单个扬声器的音量水平 在 [SPEAKER] 菜单中选择 [ 电平设置 ] 左前置音箱 (L), 中置音箱 (C), 右前置音箱 (R), 左后置音箱 (SL), 右后置音箱 (SR), 重低音音箱设置前方左 / 右扬声器, 中央扬声器, 环绕声左 / 右扬声器和超低音扬声器的音量水平 控制范围 :0 分贝到 -12 分贝控制步距 :1 分贝检测音调有测试音调输出以帮助您设置各个扬声器的音量水平 1 在 [ 扬声器 ] 菜单的 [ 电平设置 ] 中选择 [ 检测音调 ] 2 按下 / 选择 [ 关 ], [ 手册 ] 或 [ 自动 ] 关选择此项, 不输出测试音调 手册选择此项, 手动输出测试音调 自动选择此项, 从各扬声器中自动输出测试音调 3 对于 [ 自动 ], 按下 / 选择 [ 是 ], 然后按下 输出测试音调 对于 [ 手册 ], 按下 / 选择扬声器, 然后按下 输出测试音调 注 当 [ 模拟输出 ] 设置到 [ 立体模式 ] ( 请参阅第 31 页上的 设置模拟输出 ) 时, 中央扬声器, 环绕声扬声器和超低音扬声器不输出测试音调 这些设置仅对模拟输出有效 设置超级音频 CD 配置 您可以为超级音频 CD 碟片选择扬声器大小以及开 / 关状态 您也可以为所有低频信号选择截取 ( 交叉 ) 频率 在所选频率下的所有频率被发送到副低音扬声器 在 [SPEAKER] 菜单中选择 [SA-CD] 超级音频激光唱盘配置从以下 3 种设置中选择扬声器大小以及开 / 关状态 扬声器 大小或开 / 关 配置 1 配置 2 配置 3 前方左 / 右大小大 中央大小小 环绕声左 / 右大小小 超低音扬声器开开关 取舍频率为所有低频信号选择截取 ( 交叉 ) 频率 在所选频率下的所有频率被发送到副低音扬声器 控制范围 :60, 80, 100, 120 (Hz) 33 Zh

81 设置菜单 视频设置菜单 当您的电视机的宽高比为 4:3: 设置播放碟片电视机显示 设置 1/1 GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER VIDEO HDMI DISC TV 显示 TV 类型宽频格式黑色水平 *1 关闭字模 *1 静止模式三色视频 SCART 视频输出 *2 4:3 Pan Scan 16:9 4:3 16:9 *2 Move: Return Select: Enter 4:3 Letter Box *1: [ 黑色水平 ] 和 [ 关闭字模 ] 仅限于美国和加拿大型号 *2: [SCART 视频输出 ] 仅限于英国, 欧洲和俄国型号 4:3 设置电视机显示 设置本机的宽高比以匹配您的电视机 碟片上必须有您所选择的格式 在 [VIDEO] 菜单中选择 [TV 显示 ] 4:3 Pan Scan 如果您的电视机的宽高比是 4:3, 选择此项 在此设置下, 图像的两个方向都被截去或格式化以适合您的电视机屏幕 4:3 Letter Box 如果您的电视机的宽高比是 4:3, 选择此项 在此设置下, 宽银幕图像在电视机上显示时, 上下各有一条黑带 16:9 如果您有一个宽屏幕电视机, 选择此项 本机的设置和电视机显示的关系当您的电视机的宽高比为 16:9 ( 宽屏幕 ): 设置播放碟片电视机显示 *1: 有些电视机上, 图像的一个方向可能被拉长 在此情形下, 请检查您的电视机的屏幕尺寸和宽高比 *2: 如果碟片不能以 panscan 播放, 就使用 letterbox 播放 设置电视机类型 此菜单包括选择为匹配您的电视机的色彩制式的选项 有关详情, 请参阅第 16 页上的 步骤 3: 设置电视机类型 选择宽屏幕格式 设置屏幕上放映图像的宽高比 该功能仅限于逐行扫描和 HDMI 输出有效 在 [VIDEO] 菜单中选择 [ 宽频格式 ] 伸展使用非线性拉伸在 16:9 屏幕显示 4:3 图像时选择该项 ( 屏幕的中央位置被拉伸的程度小于周边 ) 邮箱不使用拉伸在 16:9 屏幕显示 4:3 图像时选择该项 即使本机在播放以 16:9 的挤压模式录制的碟片时, 也是在屏幕的中央显示图像 16:9 16:9 4:3 *1 关不进行宽高比调节时选择该项 34 Zh

82 设置菜单 选择黑色水平 ( 仅限于美国和加拿大型号 ) 如果您设置 [TV 类型 ] 到 [NTSC] ( 请参阅第 16 页上的 步骤 3: 设置电视机类型 ), 让该设置平移到 [ 开 ] 以改善播放使得颜色反差 在 [VIDEO] 菜单中选择 [ 黑色水平 ] 开选择此项以增强黑色水平 关选择此项以使用标准的黑色水平设置 注 该功能仅限于 CVBS ( 复合视频 ) 和 S - 视频输出 如果 [TV 类型 ] 被设置为 [PAL] 或 [ 多 ], 该设置不受影响 ( 请参阅第 16 页上的 步骤 3: 设置电视机类型 ) 选择隐藏字幕 ( 仅限于美国和加拿大型号 ) 隐藏字幕是特定的碟片中, 隐藏在视频信号中的一种数据, 如果不使用特定的解码器就不能看到 普通字幕和隐藏字幕的区别在于, 普通字幕是为了能听见的人, 而隐藏字幕为了有听力障碍的人 普通字幕很少能显示音频的所有信息 例如, 隐藏字幕可以显示音响效果 ( 比如, 电话响了, 脚步声 等 ), 而普通字幕则不能 在选择此设置之前, 请确认您的碟片含有隐藏字幕信息, 而且电视机也支持这种功能 在 [VIDEO] 菜单中选择 [ 关闭字模 ] 开选择此项以启用隐藏字幕功能 关选择此项以禁止隐藏字幕功能 注 设置静止模式 您可以选择暂停或逐帧播放时的图像质量 在 [VIDEO] 菜单中选择 [ 静止模式 ] 帧扫描当你选择 [ 场扫描 ] 时, 如果图像不稳定, 可选择此项 场扫描选择此项以使用标准静态模式设置 该设置适合于播放快速运动场景 选择扫描功能 该功能仅当您通过分量视频插孔 ( 请参阅第 12 页上的 分量视频插孔 <C> ) 连接具有逐行扫描功能的电视机时有效 该功能使得您可以欣赏到逼真的彩色和高质量的图像 本机装有 DCDi 电路 在 [VIDEO] 菜单中选择 [ 三色视频 ] 前进选择此项以启用逐行扫描功能 如果您选择此项时确认屏幕出现, 此时, 选择 [ 是 ], 然后按下 交错选择此项以启用隔行扫描功能 y 在逐行扫描播放时, 前面板的 P.SCAN 指示器点亮 启用逐行扫描的注意事项 : 当 HDMI 视频信号输出时, 分量视频被固定到隔行视频 在逐行扫描模式, 在宽屏幕电视机上 4:3 宽高比的图像被水平地拉长 如果您期望观看原来的宽高比, 即没有变形的图像, 请改变您的电视机的宽高比设置 您也可以在 [ 宽频格式 ]( 请参阅第 34 页上的 选择宽屏幕格式 ) 改变宽高比的设置 请确认您的电视机具有逐行扫描功能 使用分量视频缆线连接 中文 该功能仅限于 CVBS ( 复合视频 ) 和 S - 视频输出 35 Zh

83 设置菜单 用户必须注意, 不是所有高清晰度电视机都与本机完全兼容, 它们会在显示图像时出现非自然信号 在 525 或 625 线逐行扫描图像出现问题时, 我们建议您将连接切换到 标准清晰度 输出 如果出现有关视频监视器与本型号 525P 和 625P DVD 播放机兼容的问题, 请与我们的客户服务中心联系 本机兼容 Yamaha 这一系列的各产品, 包括 DPX-1300, DPX-830 以及等离子监视器 PDM-4220 HDMI 设置菜单 设置 GENERAL HDMI 视频设置 AUDIO DVI 输出范围 HDMI 音频设置 SPEAKER 1/1 切换 SCART 视频输出 ( 仅限于英国, 欧洲俄国型号 ) 选择该设置, 在 CVBS ( 复合视频 ) 和 RGB 之间切换从 AV 端子输出的视频信号 在 [ 视频设置 ] 菜单中选择 [SCART 视频输出 ] CVBS 选择该项, 以输出复合视频信号 三原色 ( 红 / 绿 / 蓝 ) 选择该项, 以输出 RGB 视频信号 注 本机从 AV 端子不输出 S- 视频信号 Move: VIDEO HDMI DISC 设置 HDMI 视频 Return Select: Enter 根据您所使用的监视器您可以调节分辨率 只有当本机连接到通过 HDMI 插孔的 HDMI 兼容装置时, 该功能才有效 本机兼容以下视频格式 : 480p/60 Hz, 576p/50 Hz, 720p/50 Hz, 60 Hz, 1080i/50 Hz, 60 Hz, and 1080p/50 Hz, 60 Hz. 在 [HDMI] 菜单中选择 [HDMI 视频设置 ] 480p/576p 对于 480/576 逐行扫描视频选择该项 720p 对于 720 逐行扫描视频选择该项 1080i 对于 1080 隔行扫描视频选择该项 1080p 对于 1080 逐行扫描视频选择该项 自动需要自动根据您的监视器设置本机到最高分辨率设置时, 选择该项 注 当 [TV 类型 ] 被设置为 [NTSC] 或 [PAL] 时, 输出的视频信号将分别为 480p 和 576p 当 HDMI 视频信号输出时, 分量视频被固定到隔行视频 除了 [ 自动 ] 设置, 请确认您所使用的 HDMI 兼容监视器支持选择的分辨率 如果选择的分辨率不被支持, 该设置将自动切换到最合适的分辨率, 新选择的分辨率临时显示在显示器的左上角和前面板显示器上 当您选择 [1080p] 以及使用长于 5 米的 HDMI 缆线时, 图像质量也许降低 36 Zh

84 设置菜单 y 参阅您的监视器附带说明书来选择适当的宽高比 通过反复按下遥控器上的 HDMI, 您也可以选择 HDMI 分辨率 选择 DVI 输出范围 您可以选择 DVI 输出范围以匹配连接的装置 只有当本机连接到通过 HDMI 插孔的 DVI-D 兼容装置时, 该功能才有效 在 [HDMI] 菜单中选择 [DVI 输出范围 ] 标准如果您选择 [ 增强 ] 而不能看到正确的图像时选择该项 增强如果图像里的黑和白不明显时选择该项 设置 HDMI 音频 设置 HDMI 音频输出以匹配连接的装置 只有当本机连接到通过 HDMI 插孔的 HDMI 兼容装置时, 该功能才有效 有关音频格式和设置之间的关系的详情, 请参阅第 13 页上的 HDMI 音频输出 在 [HDMI] 菜单中选择 [HDMI 音频设置 ] 自动选择该项可以使得本机自动根据您通过 HDMI 插孔连接的装置设置本机到最佳设置 脉冲编码调治选择此项可以通过 HDMI 插孔输出已解码多声道或 2 声道线性 PCM 音频信号 关选择此项以关闭 HDMI 音频输出 碟设置菜单 设置 GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER Move: VIDEO HDMI DISC 选择缺省音频 / 字幕 /DVD 菜单语言 这些菜单包括许多用于音频, 字幕以及录制在 DVD 上的碟片菜单等的语言设置 有关详情, 请参阅第 17 页上的 设置音频, 字幕以及碟片菜单语言 选择角度标志显示 声音语言字幕语言 DVD 菜单语言角度显示 VCD 唱片菜单显示时间 Return Select: Enter 当从不同照相角度的顺序录制被播放时, 您可以在打开或关闭之间切换角度标志显示 在 [DISC] 菜单中选择 [ 角度显示 ] 开如果您期望显示角度标志, 选择此项 角度标志被连续显示 关如果您不期望显示角度标志, 选择此项 角度标志显示 5 秒钟, 然后消失 1/1 中文 注 使用 HDMI 不能输出超级音频 CD 信号 当 [HDMI 音频设置 ] 设置到 [ 自动 ] 或 [ 脉冲编码调治 ], 数码输出信号不输出 37 Zh

85 设置菜单 选择 PBC ( 播放控制 ) 功能 您可以设置播放控制 (PBC) 到打开或关闭 仅限于具有播放控制 (PBC) 性能的 VCD 2.0 时该功能有用 在 [DISC] 菜单中选择 [VCD 唱片菜单 ] 开要显示碟片菜单, 选择此项 关不要显示碟片菜单, 选择此项 y 您也可以使用遥控器上的 MENU 按钮, 打开或关闭播放控制 (PBC) 性能 ( 请参阅第 21 页上的 使用 VCD 播放控制 (PBC) 菜单 (VCD/ 超级 VCD) ) 设置放映一张幻灯片的持续时间 您可以设置 JPEG 文件幻灯片被显示的持续时间 在 [DISC] 菜单中选择 [ 显示时间 ] 2 秒到 10 秒控制步距 :1 秒钟注根据文件大小该设置也许不能正确工作 38 Zh

86 语言编码清单 语言编码清单 阿布哈西亚语 1112 斐济 1620 林加拉语 2224 僧伽罗语 2919 阿法尔语 1111 芬兰语 1619 立陶宛语 2230 斯洛伐克语 2921 南非荷兰语 1116 法语 1628 马其顿语 2321 斯洛文尼亚语 2922 阿尔巴尼亚语 2927 弗里斯兰语 1635 马达加斯加语 2317 索马里语 2925 阿姆哈拉语 1123 加利西亚语 1722 马来语 2329 西班牙语 1529 阿拉伯语 1128 格鲁吉亚语 2111 马拉亚拉姆语 2322 巽他语 2931 亚美尼亚语 1835 德语 1415 马耳他语 2330 斯瓦希里语 2933 阿萨姆语 1129 希腊语 1522 毛利语 2319 瑞典语 2932 艾马拉语 1135 格陵兰语 2122 马拉提语 2328 他加禄语 3022 阿塞拜疆语 1136 瓜拉尼语 1724 摩尔达维亚语 2325 塔吉克语 3017 巴什基尔语 1211 古吉拉特语 1731 蒙古语 2324 泰米尔语 3011 巴斯克语 1531 豪萨语 1811 瑙鲁语 2411 塔塔尔语 3030 孟加拉语 1224 希伯来语 1933 尼泊尔语 2415 泰卢固语 3015 不丹语 1436 印地语 1819 挪威语 2425 泰语 3018 比哈尔语 1218 匈牙利语 1831 奥利亚语 2528 藏语 1225 布列塔尼语 1228 冰岛语 1929 旁遮普语 2611 提格里尼亚语 3019 保加利亚语 1217 印尼语 1924 普什图语 2629 汤加语 ( 汤加岛 ) 3025 缅甸语 2335 国际语 1911 波斯语 1611 土耳其语 3028 白俄罗斯 1215 爱尔兰语 1711 波兰语 2622 土库曼语 3021 高棉语 2123 意大利语 1930 葡萄牙语 2630 特威语 3033 加泰隆语 6765 日语 2011 凯楚亚语 2731 乌克兰语 3121 中国语 3618 爪哇语 2033 罗曼斯方言 2823 乌尔都语 3128 科西嘉语 1325 坎纳达语 2124 罗马尼亚语 2825 乌兹别克语 3136 克罗地亚语 1828 克什米尔语 2129 俄语 2831 越南语 3219 捷克语 1329 哈萨克语 2121 萨摩亚语 2923 沃拉普克语 3225 丹麦语 1411 吉尔吉斯语 2135 梵语 2911 威尔士语 1335 荷兰语 2422 朝鲜语 2125 盖尔语 1714 沃洛夫语 3325 英语 1524 库尔德语 2131 塞尔维亚语 2928 科萨语 3418 世界语 1525 老挝语 2225 克罗地亚语 2918 依地语 2019 爱沙尼亚语 1530 拉丁语 2211 绍纳语 2924 约鲁巴语 3525 法罗斯语 1625 拉脱维亚语 2232 信德语 2914 祖鲁语 3631 中文 39 Zh

87 故障排除 故障排除 当本机工作不正常时, 请参阅下面的表 如果您遇到的问题没有列在下面, 或如果下面给出的指导不起作用, 请将本机设为待机模式, 断开电源导线, 并联络距离您最近的 Yamaha 经销商或服务中心 问题解决方法参阅页码 无电源正确连接交流电源线 14 无图像 按下本机前面板上的 STANDBY/ON, 打开电源 15 请参考您的电视机附带的说明书, 检查视频输入频道是否正确 切换电视频道, 直到您看到 DVD 的屏幕 打开电视机 - 务必保证本机上的所有连接和其他装置上的所有连接安全可靠 10 如果 [ 三色视频 ] 设置到 [ 前进 ], 检查您已经通过分量视频插孔连接本机到具有逐行扫描功能的电视机 否则, 通过以下步骤关闭逐行扫描功能 ; 1. 按下前面板的, 打开碟片托盘 2. 按下按遥控器上的 CLEAR 3. 使用遥控器上的数字按钮 (0-9) 按下 按下按遥控器上的 AUDIO 如果 [HDMI 视频设置 ] 设置到 [ 自动 ] 以外, 检查分辨率为您已经连接的 HDMI 兼容监视器所支持 否则, 按以下步骤改变设置到 [ 自动 ] ; 1. 按下前面板的 s 两次或遥控器的 STOP ( 7 ) 两次, 停止播放 2. 同时按住前面板上的 s 和 p/e 3 秒钟 如果 HDMI 显示器闪烁橙色, 请检查本机到 HDCP- 兼容装置之间的连接 检查视频信号输出设置是否匹配视频连接 36 完全扭曲的图像或黑白图像检查碟片是否被本机兼容 3 屏幕大小看起来不自然, 或电视机监视器上字幕只显示一部分或者全部不显示 检查本机的电视机类型设置是否与碟片和电视机相匹配 如果您设置了不正确的电视机类型, 按照以下步骤恢复 TV 类型设置到缺省设置 ; 1. 按下前面板的, 打开碟片托盘 2. 按下按遥控器上的 CLEAR 3. 使用遥控器上的数字按钮 (0-9) 按下 按下按遥控器上的 AUDIO 检查视频连接 11 检查本机的电视机设置是否匹配电视机的屏幕宽高比 34 改变屏幕大小和电视机的宽高比 Zh

88 故障排除 问题 解决方法 参阅页码 没有声音或声音失真 调节电视机或 AV 接收机的音量 - 检查扬声器连接是否正确 - 在设置菜单上调节音量 33 数码输出无声音 检查数码连接 11 如果您播放 DTS 音源, 检查您的接收机是否可以解码 DTS 以及 [ 数字输出 ] 是否被设置到 [ 全部 ] 31 中文 如果您正在播放 MPEG-2 音源, 检查您的接收机是否可以解码 MPEG-2 否则, 确保 [ 数字输出 ] 被设置到 [ 脉冲编码调治 ] 检查选择的碟片的音频选项的音频格式是否匹配您的接收机性能 31 - HDMI 输出无声音确保 [HDMI 音频设置 ] 设置到 [ 自动 ] 或 [ 脉冲编码调治 ] 37 如果使用 HDMI-DVI 转换缆线将 DVI-D 装置连接到本机, 那么, 通过 HDMI 插孔输出的信号没有音频 要通过 HDMI 插孔输出音频信号, 连接 HDMI 装置到本机 12 碟片不播放 检查碟片格式是否被支持 3, 44 CD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW 和 DVD-R/RW 必须经过封尾处理 - 检查碟片标签的朝向 18 用尝试另外的碟片的方法检查现在碟片是否有缺陷 - 如果您自行录制 JPEG, MP3 或 WMA 碟片, 检查您的碟片是否至少包含 10 个 JPEG 图像文件或 5 首 MP3/WMA 音乐曲目 - 播放时图像突然静止不动 检查 DVD 碟片区域码 3 检查碟片表面是否有指纹 / 划伤, 使用软布从中央向边缘擦拭清洁碟片 本机不响应遥控器将遥控器直接对准前面板上的遥控传感器 15 按钮不工作 减小从本机到遥控器的距离 15 更换遥控器电池 15 按照极性 (+/- 符号 ) 指向再次插入电池 15 将电源线从交流电源插座上拔下几分钟 再次插上电源线并像平常一样再进行操作 播放时本机不回应某些操作命令操作也许不被该碟片许可 详情请参阅碟片封套的说明 - 菜单项目不能被选择根据连接状态或碟片的特性不同, 有些菜单项目也许不能选择 - 不可播放 SA-CD 碟片 当 [SA-CD 模式 ] 设置到 [CD] 时, 本机不播放没有 CD 层的 SA- CD 碟片 当 DivX 电影播放时没有声音本机也许不支持该音频编码 Zh

89 术语 术语 宽高比显示的图像的水平和垂直的比例 普通电视机的水平和垂直尺寸之比为 4:3, 而宽荧幕为 16:9 比特来自英文 binary digit ( 二进制数字 ) 的缩写词 是计算机上所能处理的信息的最小单位 在音频系统中, 比特数决定了模拟信号数字化时的分辨率 比特数越大, 动态范围 ( 最大和最小频率水平的比值 ) 就越大, 声音就越细致 一般地, 音频 CD 为 16 比特, 而 DVD 音频为 24 比特 比特率用来容纳给定的音乐长度的数据量 ; 以每秒千比特, kbps 度量 还有, 您录制时的速度 一般地, 比特率越高, 或速度越快, 声音的质量越好 但是, 高的比特率使用更多的碟片空间 分量视频插孔用来输入或输出分量视频信号的插孔 分量视频信号包括 3 条线, 亮度信号 (Y) 以及两个色差信号 (PB/CB, PR/CR), 这也是它能提供高质量视频的原因所在 DivX DivX 是一项由 DivX,Inc. 公司发明的, 有人气的媒体压缩技术 DivX 媒体文件包含高度压缩的视频, 具有极为逼真的视觉效果而只需要一个很小的文件 DivX 文件也可以包括先进的媒体性能诸如菜单, 字幕, 和更替音频曲目 许多 DivX 媒体文件可以在线下载, 使用 DivX.com 提供的实用工具, 您可以从自己私人的材料创建您自己的 DivX Dolby Digital 杜比实验室开发的数码环绕声系统, 提供完整的独立多声道音频 有 3 个前声道 ( 左, 中, 右 ) 和 2 个环绕声立体声声道,Dolby Digital 能提供 5 个完全范围的音频声道 它有一个专用于称为 ( 低频效果 ) 低频效果的额外声道, 此系统一共有 5.1 声道 ( 被算成 0.1 声道 ) 通过对于环绕声扬声器使用 2 声道立体声, 它比能提供更精确的移动声音效果和环绕声环境 DTS 数字影院系统是 DTS, Inc. 公司开发的系统, 它可以提供 5.1 声道的音频 ( 最大 ) 具有丰富的音乐数据, 可以提供逼真的音响效果 DVD- 音频它是以创建高质量纯音色为唯一目标发展起来的, 在多达六个音频声道上使用了线性 PCM 和包装 PCM ( 无损编码 ) 支持 192 khz/24 比特的采样频率 HDMI HDMI ( 高分辨率多媒体界面 ) 是第一个业界支持的, 非压缩, 全数码 A/V ( 音频 / 视频 ) 界面 可提供任意 A/V 源 ( 比如顶置盒或 A/V 接收机 ) 和音频 / 视频监视器 ( 比如数码电视 DTV) 之间的界面,HDMI 仅使用一根缆线, 支持标准的, 加强的或高分辨率的视频以及多声道音频 HDMI 传输所有 ATSC (Advanced Television Systems Committee)HDTV 标准, 支持 8- 声道数码音频, 其带宽还可以满足未来的增强或其他要求 42 Zh

90 术语 隔行电视机上用得最多的扫描方式 它将电视屏幕分成偶数和奇数两个场, 然后将这两个场组合成一帧图像 JPEG (Joint Photographic Expert Group) Joint Photographic Expert Group 提出的图像压缩系统的标准 他可以将图像压缩到原来尺寸的 1-10%, 在数码照片上被有效利用 MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) 一种音频文件压缩技术 他可以将音频数据压缩到原来的 10% 的大小却可以保持 CD 水平的音质 MPEG (Moving Pictures Experts Group) 这是 ISO (International Organization for Standardization) 和 IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) 创建的数码视频和音频压缩的国际标准 包括 MPEG-1,MPEG-2, 和 MPEG-3 MPEG-1 提供 VHS 水平的视频质量, 常用于 VCD MPEG-2 提供 S-VHS 水平的视频质量, 常用于 DVD 区域码许多 DVD 碟片包含区域码, 所以, 版权所有者可以在他们认为可行的区域发行 DVD 软件 共有 6 各区域码, 它限制了 DVD 播放机只能播放与自己区域码相同的 DVD 碟片 S- 视频插孔用来输入或输出 S- 视频信号的插孔 S- 视频信号包括两条线, 亮度信号 (Y) 和颜色信号 (C), 在播放或录制时, 它可以提供高质量的视频 超级音频 CD 这种音频格式基于当前的 CD 标准, 但是包含了很多提供更高质量音响的必要信息 有 3 种类型的碟片 : 单层, 双层和混合碟片 混合碟片可以在现有的 CD 播放机上播放, 还可以在超级音频 CD 播放机上播放, 这是因为它既包含标准音频 CD 的信息, 又包含超级音频 CD 的信息 超级音频 CD 碟片 单层碟片 双层碟片 混合层碟片 中文 父母控制根据用户的年龄或各个国家的规定对碟片的播放进行限制 限制因碟片的不同而异 ; 如果该功能被启动, 碟片的级别如果超过设定的级别, 播放就被禁止 播放控制 (PBC) 一个录制在 VCD 或 SVCD 上的在屏菜单, 可以用来交互式播放或搜索 逐行扫描一种在帧面上一次显示所有扫描线的方法, 对于大屏幕可以显著减少闪变, 产生鲜明且平滑的图像 HD 层 HD 层 混合型超级音频 CD 碟片 CD 层 HD 层 1 在任何 CD 播放机上都能播放的 CD 层 高密度层包括 : 2 - 高质量 DSD 立体声 3 - 高质量 DSD 多声道 43 Zh

91 规格 规格 播放系统 DVD- 视频 DVD- 音频 DVD-R, DVD-RW DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD+R DL VCD, 超级 VCD 超级音频 CD 多声道和超级音频 CD 立体声 CD 图像 CD CD-R, CD-RW 视频性能 视频 (CVBS) 输出... 1 Vpp 到 75 ohm S- 视频输出... Y: 1 Vpp 到 75 ohm C: 0.3 Vpp 到 75 ohm 分量视频输出... Y: 1 Vpp 到 75 ohm PB/CB, PR/CR: 0.7 Vpp 到 75 ohm RGB (SCART) 输出 ( 仅限于英国, 欧洲俄国型号 ) Vpp 到 75 ohm 黑色电平移动 ( 仅限于美国型号 )... 打开 / 关闭 音频格式 数码 Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG... 压缩数码 PCM... 16, 20, 24 bits / fs 44.1, 48, 88.2, 96 khz MP3 (ISO 9660) kbps / fs 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 khz WMA kbps, 单声道, 立体声 Dolby Digital 和 DTS 多声道完全解码 模拟立体声音响 Dolby surround 声兼容自 Dolby Digital 多声道音响的向下混合 音频特性 DA 转换器 bit, 192 khz 信号 - 噪音 (1 khz) 分贝 动态范围 (1 khz) 分贝 DVD... fs 96 khz, 2 Hz-44 khz fs 48 khz, 2 Hz-22 khz 超级 VCD... fs 48 khz, 2 Hz-22 khz fs 44.1 khz, 2 Hz-20 khz CD/VCD... fs 44.1 khz, 2 Hz-20 khz 失真和噪音 (1 khz) % 电视规格 线数... PAL: 625, NTSC: 525 垂直频率... PAL: 50 Hz, NTSC: 60 Hz 播放... 多制式 (PAL/NTSC) 连接 视频输出... 1(Cinch: 黄色 ) S- 视频输出... 1 ( 微型 DIN,4 针 ) 分量视频输出 Y 输出... 1 (Cinch: 绿色 ) PB/CB 输出...1 (Cinch: 蓝色 ) PR/CR 输出...1 (Cinch: 红色 ) SCART ( 仅限于英国, 欧洲和俄国型号 )... 1 (Euroconnector) 数码输出同轴...1 (Cinch: 橘黄色 ) 光学... 1 (IEC for CDDA/LPCM, IEC for MPEG 1/2, Dolby Digital, DTS) HDMI...1 ( 类型 A) 2 声道模拟输出 ( 左 + 右 ).. 1 对 (Cinch: 白色 / 红色 ) 6 声道模拟输出音频前方左 / 右... 1 对 (Cinch: 白色 / 红色 ) 音频环绕声左 / 右... 1 对 (Cinch: 白色 / 红色 ) 音频中央...1 (Cinch: 黑色 ) 音频环绕声...1 (Cinch: 黑色 ) 包装箱 尺寸 ( 宽 深 高 ) 毫米 重量... 大约 3.3 kg 电源 电源插孔美国和加拿大型号... AC 120 V,60 Hz 英国和欧洲型号... AC 230 V,50 Hz 韩国和台湾型号... AC V, 50/60 Hz 亚洲型号... AC V,50/60 Hz 俄国型号... AC 230 V,50 Hz 功耗... 大约 21 W 功耗 ( 待机 )... 小于 0.5 W 规格时有变化, 恕不另行通知 44 Zh

92 주의 : 본기기를작동하기전에본설명서를읽어주십시오. 1 최상의성능을보장하기위해본설명서를주의깊게읽어주십시오. 나중에참조할수있도록안전한장소에보관하십시오. 2 본기기를통풍이잘되고, 서늘하고, 건조하고, 깨끗한곳에설치하십시오. 직사광선, 열원, 진동, 먼지, 습기가있거나추운곳에서멀리떨어뜨려설치하십시오. 캐비닛안에서는통풍을위해본기기주위로 2.5 cm 의여유공간을확보하십시오. 3 윙윙거리는소리를피하려면본기기를다른전기기기, 모터또는변압기에서떨어진곳에설치하십시오. 4 본기기를찬곳에서더운곳으로이동하는등급격한온도변화에노출시키지마십시오. 기기내부에응결이발생하는것을방지하려면본기기를가습기가있는방과같은습도가높은환경에두지마십시오. 감전, 화재, 제품손상, 또는부상의원인이될수있습니다. 5 기기위로이물질혹은액체가떨어지거나튈위험이있는곳에본기기를설치하지마십시오. 또한, 다음과같은물체를본기기위에올려놓지마십시오. 본기기표면에손상을입히거나변색시킬수있는기기 화재, 제품손상, 또는부상의원인이될수있는양초와같은타는물체 감전또는제품손상의원인이될수있는액체가들어있는용기 6 열복사를가로막지않도록신문, 테이블커버, 커튼등으로본기기를덮지마십시오. 본기기내부의온도가올라가면화재, 제품손상또는부상의원인이될수있습니다. 7 모든연결이완료되기전에본기기를콘센트에꽂지마십시오. 8 본기기를거꾸로놓고작동하지마십시오. 과열되어손상될수있습니다. 9 스위치, 노브또는코드에무리한힘을가하지마십시오. 10 전원코드를콘센트에서뽑을때는플러그를잡으시고코드를잡아당기지마십시오. 11 본기기를화학용제로닦지마십시오. 마감재가손상될수있습니다. 깨끗하고마른천으로닦으십시오. 12 본기기에명시된전압만사용해야합니다. 본기기를명시된전압보다더높은전압에서사용하면매우위험하며화재, 제품손상, 또는부상의원인이될수있습니다. 명시된전압과다른전압을사용하여발생한어떤손상에대해서도 Yamaha 는책임을지지않습니다. 13 본기기를개조하거나직접수리하지마십시오. 서비스가필요한경우, 자격을갖춘 Yamaha 서비스센터에문의하십시오. 어떤경우에도본체를열어서는안됩니다. 14 본기기를휴가등으로인해장시간동안사용하지않을경우콘센트에서 AC 전원플러그를뽑아두십시오. 15 본기기에결점이있다고판단하기에앞서일반적인작동오류에대한 문제해결 장을반드시읽어주십시오. 16 본기기를이동하기전에 STANDBY/ON 을눌러본기기를대기모드로설정한다음콘센트에서 AC 전원플러그를뽑으십시오. 17 전원을기기로부터완전히차단하기위해서는기기의플러그를콘센트에서분리해야합니다. 따라서기기를설치할때벽면콘센트에쉽게접근할수있도록하여주십시오. 18 건전지를직사광선, 불꽃등과같이과도한화기에노출시키지마십시오. 본기기가콘센트에연결되어있으면본기기의자체전원이꺼져있어도전원이차단되지않습니다. 이상태를대기모드라합니다. 이상태에서본기기는아주작은양의전력을소모하도록설계되어있습니다. 경고화재또는감전의위험을줄이기위해본기기를비또는습기에노출시키지마십시오. 주의배터리를올바르게교체하지않으면폭발할위험이있습니다. 같거나비슷한종류의배터리만교체하십시오. 레이저안전본기기는레이저를사용하고있습니다. 시력이손상될수있으므로공인서비스기술자만커버를열고본기기를수리해야합니다. 위험본기기를열면가시레이저방사선이방출됩니다. 육안으로빔을직접보지마십시오. 본기기플러그가콘센트에연결된경우, 디스크트레이의입구나다른개구부또는내부에눈을가깝게대지마십시오. 레이저형식파장 출력 빔확산 CAUTION-VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS. 반도체레이저 GaAlAs 650 nm (DVD) 790 nm (VCD/CD) 1.45 mw (DVD) 1.13 mw (VCD/CD) 60 도 i Ko 주의

93 목차 소개 3 디스크조작 18 재생할수있는디스크형식...3 DVD 지역코드... 3 특허정보...4 디스크청소...4 부속품...4 기능개요 5 전면패널...5 전면패널디스플레이...6 후면패널...7 리모콘...8 연결 10 연결시일반참고사항 오디오연결 스테레오앰프연결 채널 / 멀티채널입력단자가있는 AV 리시버연결 비디오연결 HDMI 연결 전원케이블연결 시작하기 15 1 단계 : 리모콘에건전지장착 리모콘사용 단계 : 전원을켭니다 단계 : TV 종류설정 단계 : 언어선호도설정 온스크린디스플레이 (OSD) 언어설정 오디오, 자막및디스크메뉴언어설정 기본조작...18 재생일시정지...18 트랙 / 챕터선택...18 역방향 / 정방향으로검색...19 반복재생...19 반복재생...19 구간반복 (DVD 오디오 /MP3/WMA/JPEG 제외 )...19 무작위재생 (DVD/SA-CD 제외 )...19 프로그램재생 (CD)...20 디스크메뉴조작 (DVD/VCD/SVCD)...20 DVD 메뉴사용...20 비디오 CD 재생콘트롤 (PBC) 메뉴사용 (VCD/SVCD)...21 온스크린디스플레이 (OSD) 메뉴 (DVD/VCD/SVCD/SA-CD)...21 OSD 메뉴사용 (DVD/VCD/SVCD/CD)...21 텍스트정보표시 (SA-CD)...22 화질설정메뉴 (DVD/VCD/SVCD)...22 영상설정조정...22 화면확대 / 축소 (DVD 비디오 /VCD/SVCD/DivX /JPEG)...23 보기앵글 (DVD 비디오 )...23 오디오및자막언어 (DVD 비디오 /VCD)...24 오디오언어선택...24 자막언어선택 (DVD 비디오 )...24 DivX 외부자막파일...24 페이지변경 (DVD 오디오 )...24 그룹 / 파일선택 (DVD 오디오 /DivX /MP3/WMA/Kodak 사진 CD)...25 그룹선택 (DVD 오디오 )...25 폴더안의파일선택 (DivX /MP3/WMA/Kodak 사진 CD)...25 보너스그룹재생 (DVD 오디오 )...25 재생영역및레이어변경 (SA-CD)...25 멀티미디어파일재생 (MP3/WMA/DivX /JPEG)...26 섬네일화면표시 (JPEG)...26 영상회전 (JPEG)...26 한국어 계속 1 Ko

94 목차 설정메뉴 27 언어코드목록 39 메뉴개요...27 설정메뉴조작...28 일반설정메뉴...29 DVD 오디오모드선택 SA-CD 모드선택 OSD 언어를설정합니다 시청제한기능으로재생제한 비밀번호변경 화면보호기설정 자동전원기능설정 슬립타이머설정 시스템재설정 DivX VOD 등록코드표시 오디오설정메뉴...31 아날로그출력설정 디지털출력설정 LPCM 출력설정 야간감상모드설정 스피커설정메뉴...32 스피커크기설정 스피커거리설정 스피커레벨설정 SA-CD 구성설정 비디오설정메뉴...34 TV 디스플레이설정 TV 종류설정 와이드화면형식선택 블랙레벨선택 ( 미국및캐나다모델전용 ) 닫힌캡션선택 ( 미국및캐나다모델전용 ) 정지모드설정 스캔기능선택 SCART 비디오출력전환 ( 영국, 유럽및러시아모델전용 ) HDMI 설정메뉴...36 HDMI 비디오설정 DVI 출력범위선택 HDMI 오디오설정 디스크설정메뉴...37 기본오디오 / 자막 / DVD 메뉴언어선택 앵글마크표시선택 PBC ( 재생컨트롤 ) 기능선택 슬라이드쇼의지속기간설정 문제해결 40 용어해설 42 사양 44 2 Ko

95 소개 소개 본기기를구입해주셔서감사합니다. 본사용설명서에는본기기기본조작에대해설명합니다. 별도로지정되어있지않은경우, 본설명서의그림은영국, 유럽및러시아모델을기준으로합니다. 참고는안전및조작설명에대한중요한정보를포함하고있습니다. y 는조작을위한팁입니다. 본설명서는제품이생산되기전에인쇄됩니다. 제품이향상되어디자인과제품사양이변경될수있습니다. 설명서와제품간에차이가있는경우에는제품을우선시합니다. 재생할수있는디스크형식 본제품은다음과같은디스크를사용하도록설계되었습니다. DVD 비디오, DVD 오디오, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD+R DL, 비디오 CD, SVCD, SA-CD, 오디오 CD, CD-R 및 CD-RW. 참고 마무리되지않은 CD-R(W), DVD-R(W) 및 DVD+R(W) 를재생할수없습니다. 본기기에서는복제방지되어있는 WMA 파일을재생할수없습니다. 본기기는 2848x2136 픽셀크기의 JPEG 파일을지원합니다. PC 환경및응용프로그램소프트웨어등과같은기록조건에따라일부디스크를재생할수없습니다. 자재, 긁힘, 뒤틀림등과같은일부디스크의특징및조건은제대로재생하지못할수도있습니다. 믿을수있는제조업체에서생산한 CD-R(W), DVD-R(W) 및 DVD+R(W) 디스크만사용하십시오. 어떤비표준형태의디스크 ( 하트모앙등 ) 를사용하지마십시오. 표면에테이프, 씰또는풀이있는디스크를사용하지마십시오. 본기기를손상시킬수도있습니다. 시중에서판매하는라벨프린터로인쇄한라벨을부착한디스크를사용하지마십시오. DVD 지역코드 지역관리시스템을지원하도록설계되었습니다. DVD 디스크포장의지역코드번호를확인하십시오. 번호가기기의지역코드 ( 아래의표또는기기의뒷면참고 ) 와일치하지않으면기기는디스크를재생하지못할수도있습니다. 한국어 국가 기기의지역코드 재생할수있는디스크 미국캐나다 1 1 ALL 본기기는다음을재생할수있습니다. - CD-R(W)/DVD-R(W)/DVD+R(W) 에기록된 MP3, WMA( 복제방지되어있는 WMA 제외 ) 및사진 (Kodak, JPEG) 파일 -JPEG/ISO 9660 포맷 - 최대 14 문자디스플레이 -CD-R(W)/DVD-R(W)/DVD+R(W) 의 DivX 디스크 - 공식 DivX 인증제품 - 모든 DivX 비디오버전 (DivX 6 포함 ) 재쟁및 DivX 미디어파일표준재생 영국유럽 아시아한국 러시아 2 2 ALL 3 3 ALL 5 5 ALL 3 Ko

96 소개 특허정보 디스크청소 - Dolby Laboratories 의허가하에제작되었습니다. Dolby 및이중 D 부호는 Dolby Laboratories 의상표입니다. 디스크가지저분하면깨끗한천으로디스크를닦아주십시오. 가운데에서바깥으로디스크를닦아주십시오. 원을그리면서닦지마십시오. 벤젠, 신너, 시중에서판매하는클리너또는아날로그레코드에사용하는정전기방지스프레이등과같은솔벤트를사용하지마십시오. DTS 및 DTS Digital Surround 는 DTS, Inc. 의등록상표입니다. DivX, DivX Certified 및관련로고는 DivX, Inc. 의상표이며라이선스를허자받아사용됨. 부속품 다음항목이포함되어있는지포장을확인하십시오. 리모콘 건전지 (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) DCDi 는 Genesis Microchip, Inc. 의사업부인 Faroudja 의상표입니다. DIMMER POWER HDMI AUDIO DIRECT STANDBY GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH HDMI, HDMI 로고및 High Definition Multimedia Interface 는 HDMI Licensing LLC 의상표또는등록상표입니다. CLEAR SETUP STOP PROG RANDOM REPEAT A B SLOW SEARCH PLAY PAUSE 오디오핀케이블 본제품은미국특허권특허청구항의보호를받는복제방지기술과 Macrovision Corporation 및기타저작권소유자가소유하고있는지적재산권을보유하고있습니다. 이복제방지기술을사용하려면반드시 Macrovision Corporation 의승인을받아야하며, Microvision Corporation 의승인을받지않으면가정이나제한된장소에서시청용으로사용할수있습니다. 역공학및분해는금지되어있습니다. SKIP TOP MENU ON SCREEN MENU RETURN SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM 비디오핀케이블 전원케이블 4 Ko

97 기능개요 기능개요 전면패널 1 STANDBY ON HDMI AUDIO DIRECT 한국어 디스크트레이디스크트레이에디스크를넣습니다. 6 디스크트레이를열거나닫습니다. 2 STANDBY/ON 본기기의전원을켜거나대기모드로설정합니다. 3 HDMI 표시등본기기에서 HDMI 콤포넌트를인식하고 HDMI 모드가 ON 으로설정된경우녹색등이점등됩니다. HDMI 모드가 ON 으로설정된상태에서본기기에서 HDMI 콤포넌트를인식하지않으면오렌지색등이점등됩니다. 4 AUDIO DIRECT 표시등리모콘에서 AUDIO DIRECT 를눌러 AUDIO DIRECT 모드를선택하면점등됩니다. 5 전면패널디스플레이재생정보또는설정을표시합니다. 7 b/w 역방향으로검색합니다.* 이전챕터또는트랙으로이동합니다. 8 f/a 정방향으로검색합니다.* 다음챕터또는트랙으로이동합니다. 9 p/e 재생을시작하거나일시정지합니다. 0 s 재생을정지합니다. * 약 2 초동안버튼을누르고있습니다. 5 Ko

98 기능개요 전면패널디스플레이 SVCD WMA MP3 JPEG DVD AUDIO SA-CD DivX P.SCAN TITLE GROUP CHP/ TRK D MULTI D.MIX PROG. RANDOM ALL A B P.SCAN 표시등프로그레시브스캔기능이활성화되면점등됩니다. 2 재생모드표시등선택한재생모드에대한아이콘을표시합니다. 3 디코더표시등선택한내장디코더에대한아이콘을표시합니다. 4 MULTI 표시등멀티채널오디오소스를재생하면점등됩니다. 5 D.MIX 표시등 (DVD 오디오만해당 ) 멀티채널오디오소스를다운믹싱할수있는디스크를재생하면점등됩니다. 6 디스크표시등디스크형식에해당하는아이콘을표시합니다. 7 정보디스플레이타이틀 / 챕터 / 트랙번호또는경과재생시간등과같은다양한정보를표시합니다. y 리모콘의 DIMMER 를사용하여전면패널디스플레이의밝기를조절할수있습니다. 6 Ko

99 기능개요 후면패널 MAINS PR / CR L C L COAXIAL IN VIDEO AV PB / CB Y R R MIXED 2CH FRONT SUBWOOFER SURROUND OUT ON OFF OPTICAL RS 232C HDMI S VIDEO COMPONENT AUDIO OUT DIGITAL REMOTE CONTROL VIDEO OUT q w ( 영국, 유럽및러시아모델 ) 한국어 1 AUDIO OUT (6 채널 discrete) 단자 AV 리시버의 6 채널입력단자에연결합니다. 2 DIGITAL (COAXIAL) 단자 AV 리시버의동축입력단자에연결합니다. 3 REMOTE CONTROL (IN/OUT) 커넥터케이블연결을통해리모콘신호를전송하기위해사용자정의설치에사용됩니다. 4 REMOTE CONTROL (RS-232C) 단자 ( 미국, 캐나다, 영국, 유럽및러시아모델전용 ) 상업용확장터미널로사용합니다. 자세한내용은대리점에문의하십시오. 5 AV 단자 ( 영국, 유럽및러시아모델전용 ) TV 의 SCART 입력터미널에연결합니다. 6 VIDEO OUT (VIDEO) 단자 AV 리시버의컴포지트비디오입력단자에연결합니다. 7 MAINS 동봉된전원케이블을연결합니다. 8 AUDIO OUT (MIXED 2CH) 단자 AV 리시버또는스테레오의오디오입력단자에연결합니다. 9 DIGITAL (OPTICAL) 단자 AV 리시버의광입력단자에연결합니다. 0 HDMI 단자 HDMI 콤포넌트의 HDMI 입력단자에연결합니다. q VIDEO OUT (S VIDEO) 단자 AV 리시버의 S 비디오입력단자에연결합니다. w VIDEO OUT (COMPONENT) 단자 AV 리시버의콤포넌트입력단자에연결합니다. 리모콘커넥터및 RS-232C 터미널 REMOTE CONTROL (IN/OUT) 커넥터및 REMOTE CONTROL (RS-232C) 터미널은사용자정의설치에사용됩니다. RS-232C 스위치를 OFF 로설정해두고정상적인사용중에어떤케이블도이커넥터에연결하지마십시오. 주의 : 본기기의후면패널에있는단자의내측핀을만지지마십시오. 정전기방전으로인해본기기에영구적인손상을줄수있습니다. 7 Ko

100 기능개요 리모콘 1 DIMMER 전면패널디스플레이의밝기를밝게, 어둡게, 자동의세레벨중에서선택합니다. 자동설정의경우밝기는재생중에만낮음으로자동설정됩니다. POWER q DIMMER HDMI AUDIO DIRECT STANDBY GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH PROG RANDOM REPEAT A B CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH STOP PAUSE PLAY SKIP TOP MENU ON SCREEN y u i o p a s d f g h j 2 HDMI HDMI 해상도설정간에전환하거나 HDMI 모드를끕니다 (36 페이지참조 ). y 리모콘의를반복해서누르거나설정메뉴를사용하여 HDMI 해상도를선택할수있습니다. 리모컨의를한번누르면현재선택된해상도설정이디스플레이왼쪽위모서리와전면패널디스플레이에표시됩니다. 3 GROUP DVD 오디오그룹을선택합니다 (25 페이지참조 ). 4 PAGE (+/-) DVD 오디오정지화면을선택합니다 (24 페이지참조 ). w e MENU RETURN k 5 숫자키패드 (0-9) 현재표시된메뉴에서번호가있는항목을선택합니다. r t SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM l ; 6 CLEAR 모드또는설정을지웁니다 (20 페이지참조 ). 7 SETUP 본기기의설정메뉴에접근하거나메뉴에서나갑니다 (28 페이지참조 ). 8 STOP ( 7 ) 재생을정지합니다 (18 페이지참조 ). 9 PAUSE ( 8 ) 재생을일시정지합니다 (18 페이지참조 ). 프레임별재생 (18 페이지참조 ). 0 SKIP (l22 / 33l) 이전 / 다음챕터또는트랙으로이동합니다. q TOP MENU 상위레벨디스크메뉴를표시합니다. y 타이틀메뉴가있는디스크는타이틀메뉴가표시됩니다. 8 Ko

101 기능개요 w 커서 ( / / / ) 현재표시된메뉴에서항목을선택합니다. 메뉴선택을확인합니다. e MENU 디스크메뉴에접근합니다 (20 페이지참조 ). r SUBTITLE 자막언어를선택합니다 (24 페이지참조 ). t AUDIO 오디오언어또는형식을선택합니다 (24 페이지참조 ). y POWER ( l ) 본기기의전원을켭니다 (15 페이지참조 ). d A-B 특정세그먼트를반복합니다 (19 페이지참조 ). f 메뉴선택을확인합니다. g SLOW / SEARCH (22 / 33) 정방향또는역방향으로검색합니다 (19 페이지참조 ). h PLAY ( 3) 재생을시작합니다 (18 페이지참조 ). j ON SCREEN 본기기의온스크린디스플레이 (OSD) 메뉴에접근하거나메뉴에서나갑니다 (21 페이지참조 ). 화질설정메뉴에접근하려면재생중에두번누릅니다 (22 페이지참조 ). 한국어 u STANDBY ( ) 본기기를대기모드로설정합니다 (15 페이지참조 ). i AUDIO DIRECT 오디오품질을향상하기위해오디오디스크재생중에는비디오출력을끕니다. 비디오출력을켜려면다시누릅니다. HDMI 출력에는이기능을사용할수없습니다. AUDIO DIRECT 모드에서전면패널디스플레이는꺼집니다. 일단본기기가꺼지면 AUDIO DIRECT 모드가취소됩니다. (SA-CD 디스크를재생하는경우에만, 디스크트레이가열리거나닫히면모드가취소됩니다 ). k RETURN 이전설정메뉴로되돌아갑니다. l ZOOM 비디오이미지를확대합니다 (23 페이지참조 ). ; ANGLE DVD 카메라앵글을선택합니다 (23 페이지참조 ). y 두개의버튼 (w 및 f) 은동일한방식으로작동합니다. o MULTI / 2CH 사운드모드즉, 스테레오또는멀티채널을선택합니다. SA-CD 재생영역을변경합니다 (25 페이지참조 ). p PROG 디스크트랙을프로그래밍하기위해프로그램설정메뉴에접근하거나, 메뉴에서나갑니다 (20 페이지참조 ). a RANDOM 무작위순서로트랙을재생합니다 (19 페이지참조 ). s REPEAT 챕터, 트랙, 타이틀, 그룹또는디스크를반복합니다 (19 페이지참조 ). 9 Ko

102 연결 연결 연결시일반참고사항 본기기를연결하거나연결사항을변경하려면먼저기기를끄고전원케이블을분리하십시오. 연결하려는콤포넌트에따라다양한방법으로연결할수있습니다. 아래에가능한연결에대해설명되어있습니다. 최적의연결을위해필요한경우다른콤포넌트에동봉된설명서를참고하십시오. VCR 을통해본기기를연결하지마십시오. 복제방지시스템으로인해비디오화질이찌그러질수있습니다. 오디오시스템의포노 (phono) 입력단자에본기기의오디오출력단자를연결하지마십시오. 6 채널 / 멀티채널입력단자가있는 AV 리시버연결 아날로그연결멀티채널 SA-CD 및 DVD 오디오를재생하려는경우시중에서판매하는오디오핀케이블을사용하여 AV 리시버의해당입력단자에본기기의 AUDIO OUT (6 채널 Discrete) 단자를연결합니다. L C L COAXIAL IN AV 오디오연결 본기기에는디지털동축, 디지털광, 아날로그 6 채널 Discrete 및아날로그혼합 2 채널출력단자가있습니다. 콤포넌트의오디오단자사용여부에따라연결하십시오. R R MIXED 2CH FRONT SUBWOOFER SURROUND OPTICAL AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT ON OFF RS 232C REMOTE CONTROL HDMI 본기기 ( 영국, 유럽및러시아모델 ) 스테레오앰프연결 동봉된오디오핀케이블을사용하여본기기의 AUDIO OUT (MIXED 2CH) 단자를오디오콤포넌트 ( 예 : 스테레오앰프 ) 의해당입력단자에연결합니다. 서브우퍼를 SUBWOOFER 단자에연결할수있습니다. FRONT R L C SUBWOOFER SURROUND R L AV 리시버 본기기 ( 영국, 유럽및러시아모델 ) 스피커 L C L COAXIAL IN AV R R MIXED 2CH FRONT SUBWOOFER SURROUND OPTICAL AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT ON OFF RS 232C REMOTE CONTROL HDMI 오디오핀케이블 ( 동봉품 ) 스테레오앰프 CD / DVD R L 좌측스피커 우측스피커 서브우퍼 10 Ko

103 연결 디지털연결 AV 리시버에서 Dolby Digital, DTS 또는 MPEG 기능을사용하려면시중에서판매하는디지털광또는디지털동축케이블을사용하여본기기의 DIGITAL (OPTICAL) <A> 또는 DIGITAL (COAXIAL) <B> 단자를 AV 리시버의해당입력단자에연결합니다. L C L COAXIAL IN AV 비디오연결 본기기에는 SCART, 컴포지트비디오, S 비디오및콤포넌트비디오출력단자가있습니다. AV 리시버에비디오출력단자가있는경우리시버의입력소스선택기만전환하여여러비디오소스 (LD, VCR 등 ) 에대해하나의 TV 를사용할수있도록리시버와 TV 를차례로연결하십시오. 연결할콤포넌트의입력단자에해당하는단자를사용하십시오. R MIXED 2CH FRONT SUBWOOFER AUDIO OUT R SURROUND OPTICAL DIGITAL 본기기 ( 영국, 유럽및러시아모델 ) OUT ON OFF RS 232C REMOTE CONTROL HDMI 본기기 ( 영국, 유럽및러시아모델 ) PR / CR VIDEO AV PB / CB 한국어 Y RS 232C ONTROL HDMI S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO OUT <A> <B> OPTICAL IN COAXIAL IN 비디오핀케이블 ( 동봉품 ) AV 리시버 <A> <B> <C> <D> 스피커 VIDEO IN S-VIDEO IN PB/CB PR/CR Y COMPONENT VIDEO IN AV 리시버 참고 <A> 또는 <B> 로연결하는경우 [ 디지털출력 ] 을 [ 자동 ] 로설정하십시오 (31 페이지의 디지털출력설정 를참조하십시오 ). 디지털출력의오디오포맷이리시버의성능에맞지않을경우리시버의사운드가찌그러지거나전혀사운드가출력되지않습니다. 디스크의메뉴화면에서적절한오디오포맷을선택하십시오. 리모콘의 AUDIO 를한번이상누르면오디오언어는물론오디오포맷이변경될수있습니다. SA-CD 오디오신호는 DIGITAL (COAXIAL/OPTICAL) 단자에서출력되지않습니다. Dolby Digital, DTS 또는 MPEG 형식을감상하려면이러한형식을지원하는 AV 리시버에본기기를연결해야합니다. TV VIDEO OUT VIDEO IN S VIDEO OUT S VIDEO IN COMPONENT VIDEO OUT COMPONENT VIDEO IN 11 Ko

104 연결 컴포지트비디오단자 <A> 본기기의 VIDEO OUT (VIDEO) 단자를 AV 리시버의비디오입력단자에연결한다음동봉된비디오핀케이블을사용하여 TV 단자에연결합니다. S 비디오단자 <B> S 비디오연결로휘도 (Y) 및색차 (C) 에대한개별와이어에비디오신호를송신하여콤포지트비디오연결보다더선명한영상을얻을수있습니다. 본기기의 VIDEO OUT (S VIDEO) 단자를 AV 리시버의 S 비디오단자에연결한다음시중에서판매하는 S 비디오케이블을사용하여 TV 단자에연결합니다. HDMI 연결 HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) 는단일연결에서고품질디지털오디오및비디오를제공합니다. 본기기의 HDMI 단자를 AV 리시버의 HDMI 입력단자에연결한다음시중에서판매하는 HDMI 케이블을사용하여 TV 단자에연결합니다. 리시버에 HDMI 입력단자가없는경우본기기의 HDMI 단자를직접 TV 의 HDMI 입력단자에연결하면더나은비디오이미지를얻을수있습니다. 콤포넌트비디오단자 <C> 콤포넌트비디오연결에서는휘도 (Y: 녹색 ) 및색차 (PB: 청색, PR: 적색 ) 마다별도의와이어에서비디오신호를전송하여 S 비디오연결보다뛰어난색상을재생할수있습니다. 본기기의 VIDEO OUT (COMPONENT) 단자를 AV 리시버의콤포넌트입력단자에연결한다음시중에서판매하는콤포넌트케이블을사용하여 TV 단자에연결합니다. 연결할때각단자의컬러를확인합니다. 리시버에콤포넌트출력단자가없는경우에는본기기의콤포넌트출력단자를 TV 의콤포넌트입력단자에직접연결하여보다우수한비디오이미지를얻을수있습니다. L R MIXED 2CH C FRONT SUBWOOFER AUDIO OUT R SURROUND COAXIAL OPTICAL DIGITAL 본기기 ( 영국, 유럽및러시아모델 ) L IN OUT ON OFF RS 232C REMOTE CONTROL AV HDMI IN HDMI SCART 터미널 <D> ( 영국, 유럽및러시아모델전용 ) TV 에비디오입력터미널만있는경우에는 TV 를직접본기기에연결할수있습니다. 시중에서판매하는 SCART 케이블을사용하여본기기의 AV 터미널을 TV 의 SCART 입력터미널에연결합니다. 참고 SCART 케이블의 TV 표시가 TV 세트에연결되고 SCART 케이블의 DVD 표시가본기기에연결되었는지확인하십시오. S 비디오신호는 AV 터미널에서출력되지않습니다. SCART 비디오설정은 36 페이지참조. 참고 AV 리시버 스피커 HDMI OUT HDMI IN TV 연결한콤포넌트가오디오신호를입력하지않는경우에는적절한오디오연결을하십시오 (10 페이지참조 ). 본기기는 HDCP 비호환 HDMI 또는 DVI 콤포넌트와호환되지않습니다. 본기기를다른 DVI 콤포넌트에연결하는경우시중에서판매되는 HDMI/DVI 전환케이블이있어야합니다. 이경우본기기의 HDMI 단자가오디오신호를출력하지않기때문에이연결에다른오디오연결을사용해야합니다. 데이터가전송되는동안본기기의 HDMI 단자에연결된 HDMI/DVI 콤포넌트의전원을분리하거나끄지마십시오. 재생이중단되거나노이즈를발생시킬수있습니다. y HDMI 콤포넌트를연결할때는콤포넌트에동봉된설명서를참고하십시오. 12 Ko

105 연결 HDMI 비디오출력본기기는다음비디오형식과호환됩니다. 480p/60 Hz, 576p/50 Hz, 720p/50 Hz, 60 Hz, 1080i/50 Hz, 60 Hz 및 1080p/50 Hz, 60 Hz. 참고 리모콘의를반복해서누르거나설정메뉴를사용하여 HDMI 해상도설정중에서하나를선택해야합니다 (36 페이지참조 ). 연결된 DVI 컴포넌트에따라, 이미지의흑백이구분되지않을수있습니다. 그런경우, 연결된 DVI 컴포넌트의이미지설정을조절하십시오. HDMI 오디오출력 HDMI 오디오 오디오형식 아날로그출력설정 자동 * 1 PCM 꺼짐 Dolby 멀티채널 PCM 멀티 *2 Dolby Digital Digital 스테레오 PCM 2ch 멀티채널 PCM 멀티 *2 DTS DTS DVD 비디오스테레오 PCM 2ch MPEG 멀티채널 PCM 멀티 *2 MPEG 스테레오 PCM 2ch PCM 2ch* 4 멀티채널 / 스테레오 PCM 2ch PCM 2ch 멀티채널 PCM (PPCM) 멀티 * 2,3 PCM (PPCM) 멀티 * 2,3 멀티 DVD 오디오스테레오 PCM (PPCM) 2ch* 3 PCM (PPCM) 2ch* 3 2ch* 4 멀티채널 / 스테레오 PCM (PPCM) 2ch PCM (PPCM) 2ch 꺼짐 CD/MP3/ WMA/ DivX 2ch 멀티채널 / 스테레오 PCM 2ch PCM 2ch 멀티채널 PCM 멀티 * 2 멀티 DTS-CD 스테레오 DTS PCM 2ch 2ch 멀티채널 / 스테레오 PCM 2ch VCD 2ch 멀티채널 / 스테레오 PCM 2ch PCM 2ch 멀티채널 PCM 멀티 * 2 멀티 SVCD 스테레오 MPEG PCM 2ch 2ch 멀티채널 / 스테레오 PCM 2ch SA-CD 멀티 /2ch 멀티채널 / 스테레오 한국어 *1: 연결된 HDMI 콤포넌트에서비트스트림신호 (Dolby Digital, DTS 및 MPEG) 를지원하지않는경우오디오출력은자동으로비트스트림신호에서 PCM 신호로변경됩니다. *2:HDMI 콤포넌트에서멀티채널오디오신호를지원하지않는경우오디오출력은 PCM 멀티채널신호에서 PCM 스테레오신호및 48 khz/16 비트신호이하의신호로자동으로변경됩니다. *3: 오디오소스다운믹싱이금지되어있는경우다운믹스스테레오대신프론트 L/R 채널오디오및 48 khz/16 비트신호이하의신호가출력됩니다. *4: 연결된콤포넌트에서 48 khz 이상을지원하지않는경우오디오출력은자동으로 48 khz/16 비트신호이하의신호로변경됩니다. 참고 를설정해야합니다 (37 페이지참조 ). HDMI 를사용한 SA-CD 신호출력은불가능합니다. SD-CD 를들으려면아날로그연결을하십시오 (10 페이지참조 ). 13 Ko

106 연결 전원케이블연결 기타모든연결이완료되면동봉된전원케이블을본기기의 MAINS 에연결한다음전원케이블을 AC 콘센트에연결합니다. AC 콘센트로 MAINS 14 Ko

107 시작하기 시작하기 y 부적당한설정을한경우언제라도모든옵션과개인설정을초기공장설정으로재설정할수있습니다. 자세한내용은 30 페이지의 시스템재설정 를참조하십시오. 1 단계 : 리모콘에건전지장착 3 리모콘사용 본기기로부터 6 m 이내에서리모콘센서방향으로향하게하여리모콘을사용하십시오. 2 1 한국어 6m 이내 1 부분을누르고건전지함덮개를밀어서엽니다. 2 건전지함내부의 (+/-) 표시에따라동봉된건전지 (AAA, R03, UM-4) 두개를넣습니다. 3 덮개가제자리로찰깍하고들어갈때까지덮개를밀어서닫습니다. 참고 전극표시 (+/-) 에따라건전지를올바르게삽입하십시오. 건전지를반대방향으로삽입하면건전지액이누출될수있습니다. 누출을방지하려면방전된건전지를새건전지로즉시교체하십시오. 리모콘을한달이상사용하지않을경우건전지함에서건전지를제거하십시오. 건전지액이누출된경우에는즉시건전지를폐기하십시오. 누출액을만지거나옷등에누출액이닿지않도록하십시오. 새건전지를장착하기전에완전하게건전지함을닦으십시오. 오래된건전지를새건전지와함께사용하지마십시오. 알카라인및망간건전지와같은서로다른종류의건전지를함께사용하지마십시오. 이들서로다른종류의건전지는모양이나컬러가같을수있으므로포장지를주의깊게읽어보십시오. 해당지역규정에따라제대로건전지를폐기하십시오. 참고 리모콘에물이나다른액체를쏟지않도록하십시오. 리모콘을떨어뜨리지마십시오. 다음과같은조건하에리모콘을두거나보관하지마십시오. - 욕실근처와같이습도가높은장소 - 히터또는난로근처와같이온도가높은장소 - 매우저온인장소 - 먼지가많은장소 2 단계 : 전원을켭니다 1 전원케이블이 AC 콘센트에연결되었는지확인합니다. 2 TV 와 AV 리시버를켭니다. 3 본기기에연결되어있는 AV 리시버의해당입력소스를선택합니다. 자세한내용은 AV 리시버에동봉된설명서를참고하십시오. 4 전면패널의 STANDBY/ON 또는리모콘의 POWER ( l ) 를눌러본기기를켭니다. 전면패널디스플레이가점등됩니다. 5 TV를올바른 Video IN 채널 ( 예 : EXT1/2, AV1/2, AUDIO/VIDEO 등. 자세한내용은 TV 에동봉된설명서참고 ) 로설정합니다. TV 에기본화면이나타납니다. 15 Ko

108 시작하기 3 단계 : TV 종류설정 본기기는 NTSC 및 PAL 비디오포맷모두와호환됩니다. 해당 TV 와일치하는컬러시스템을선택하십시오. y RETURN 을눌러이전메뉴를표시합니다. SETUP 을눌러설정메뉴에서나갑니다. 1 SETUP 를누릅니다. 설정메뉴가나타납니다. SETUP GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER VIDEO HDMI DISC Move: DVD-Audio mode SA-CD mode OSD Language Parental Rating Parental Password Screen Saver Auto Power Off Sleep Timer Return Select: Enter 2 / 를반복해서눌러 [VIDEO] 를선택한다음 를누릅니다. [VIDEO] 메뉴가나타납니다. VIDEO TV Display TV Type Wide Screen Format Black Level*1 Closed Caption*1 Still Mode Component Scart Video Out*2 Move: Return 16:9 NTSC Off Off Off Field Interlaced RGB Select: Enter 1/2 1/1 *1:[Black Level] 및 [Closed Caption] 은미국및캐나다모델에만사용됩니다. *2:[Scart Video Out] 은영국, 유럽및러시아모델에만사용됩니다. 3 / 를반복해서눌러 [TV Type] 를강조합니다. VIDEO TV Display TV Type Wide Screen Format Black Level*1 Closed Caption*1 Still Mode Component Scart Video Out*2 Move: Return 16:9 NTSC Off Off Off Field Interlaced RGB Select: Enter 4 / 를눌러아래옵션중하나를선택합니다. PAL 연결한 TV 가 PAL 시스템 TV 인경우에이항목을선택합니다. NTSC 디스크의비디오신호를변경하여 PAL 형식으로출력합니다. NTSC 연결한 TV 가 NTSC 시스템 TV 인경우에이항목을선택합니다. PAL 디스크의비디오신호를변경하여 NTSC 형식으로출력합니다. MULTI 연결한 TV 가 NTSC 및 PAL 포맷모두와호환되는경우 ( 예 : 멀티시스템 TV) 에이항목을선택합니다. 출력포맷은디스크의비디오신호에따릅니다. 참고 현재 TV 표준설정을변경하기전에먼저선택한 TV 종류시스템을 TV 에서지원하는지확인하십시오. NTSC 형식디스크 ([PAL] 설정사용 ) 또는 PAL 형식디스크 ([NTSC] 설정사용 ) 을재생하는경우비디오화질이저하될수있습니다. [TV Type] 이 [MULTI] 로설정되어있으면본기기가고의아니게 HDMI 해상도를변경할수도있습니다. 이경우 [NTSC] 또는 [PAL] 설정을시도해보십시오. 1/1 16 Ko

109 시작하기 4 단계 : 언어선호도설정 선호하는언어설정을선택할수있습니다. 디스크를넣을때마다본기기는자동으로사용자가선호하는언어로전환합니다. 선택한언어를디스크에사용할수없는경우기본디스크언어가대신사용됩니다. 시스템메뉴의온스크린디스플레이 (OSD) 언어는선택한상태로유지됩니다. y RETURN 을눌러이전메뉴를표시합니다. SETUP 을눌러설정메뉴에서나갑니다. 온스크린디스플레이 (OSD) 언어설정 1 SETUP 를누릅니다. 설정메뉴가나타납니다. 2 / 를반복해서눌러 [GENERAL] 를강조한다음 를누릅니다. [GENERAL] 메뉴가나타납니다. 오디오, 자막및디스크메뉴언어설정 1 SETUP 를누릅니다. 설정메뉴가나타납니다. 2 / 를반복해서눌러 [DISC] 를강조한다음 를누릅니다. [DISC] 메뉴가나타납니다. 디스크설정 음성언어자막언어 DVD 메뉴언어앵글표시디스크메뉴표시시간 Move: Return 영어꺼짐영어켜짐꺼짐 3초 Select: Enter 1/1 한국어 GENERAL DVD-Audio mode SA-CD mode OSD Language Parental Rating Parental Password Screen Saver Auto Power Off Sleep Timer Move: Return DVD-Audio SA-CD English Level On Mode 1 Off Select: Enter 3 / 를반복해서눌러 [OSD Language] 를강조합니다. 4 / 를눌러언어를선택합니다. 1/2 3 / 를반복해서눌러 [ 음성언어 ], [ 자막언어 ] 또는 [DVD 메뉴언어 ] 를강조합니다. 4 / 를눌러언어를선택합니다. 목록에없는언어를선택하려면 : 1 [ 음성언어 ], [ 자막언어 ] 또는 [DVD 메뉴언어 ] 에서 [ 기타 ] 를선택합니다. 2 를누릅니다. 3 숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여 4 자리언어코드 (39 페이지의 언어코드목록 를참조하십시오 ) 를입력합니다. 4 를누릅니다. 17 Ko

110 디스크조작 디스크조작 참고 별도로지정되어있지않은경우, 여기에설명된모든조작은동봉된리모콘을사용하여수행됩니다. 버튼을누를때금지아이콘 ( 또는 Prohibit ) 이나타나면해당버튼의기능은현재디스크또는현재시간에사용할수없습니다. DVD 또는비디오 CD 디스크에따라일부조작은다르게작동하거나제한적일수있습니다. 디스크트레이를밀거나디스크트레이에디스크외이물체를넣지마십시오. 디스크기기가오작동할수있습니다. 기본조작 숫자키패드 (0~9) GROUP CLEAR PAGE MULTI 2CH PROG RANDOM REPEAT A B 3 를다시눌러디스크트레이를닫습니다. 본기기가디스크를인식하면자동으로재생을시작합니다. 디스크트레이가열려있는상태에서 PLAY ( 3) 를누르면디스크트레이가자동으로닫히고재생이시작됩니다. 디스크에따라복잡한디렉토리 / 파일구성으로인해디스크를읽는시간이 30초를초과할수도있습니다. 4 재생을멈추려면 STOP ( 7 ) 을누릅니다. 전면패널디스플레이에 RESUME 이나타납니다. 5 재생을재개하려면 PLAY ( 3) 를누릅니다. 마지막으로멈춘위치에서디스크가재생됩니다. y 디스크를배출하지않는한본기기를끈경우에도재생을재개할수있습니다. 6 재개모드를취소하려면 STOP ( 7 ) 을두번누릅니다. STOP ( ) PAUSE ( ) SKIP ( / ) SETUP SLOW SEARCH STOP PAUSE PLAY SKIP TOP MENU ON SCREEN SLOW/SEARCH ( / ) PLAY ( ) 참고 디스크의구성및특징또는기록조건에따라특정 MP3/JPEG/DivX 디스크를재생하지못할수도있습니다. 다운믹싱이금지된디스크를재생하는경우전면패널디스플레이에서 NO DOWN MIX 가점등됩니다. 1 전면패널의 를눌러디스크트레이를엽 니다. 2 인쇄면이위로향하게하여디스크를디스크 트레이위에놓습니다. 재생일시정지 1 재생도중 PAUSE ( 8 ) 을누릅니다. 재생이일시정지되고사운드가소거됩니다. 2 다시 PAUSE ( 8 ) 를눌러다음화면프레임을선택합니다 ( 프레임바이프레임재생 ). 3 일반재생을재개하려면 PLAY ( 3) 를누릅니다. 트랙 / 챕터선택 SKIP (l22 / 33l) 를누르거나숫자버튼 (0~9) 및 를사용하여트랙 / 챕터번호를선택합니다. SKIP (l22 / 33l) 을한번눌러현재재생중인트랙 / 챕터의맨위로이동하거나, SKIP (l22 / 33l) 을두번눌러이전트랙 / 챕터로이동할수있습니다. 트랙 / 챕터반복재생중에동일한트랙 / 챕터를다시재생하려면 SKIP (l22 / 33l) 을누릅니다. 18 Ko

111 디스크조작 역방향 / 정방향으로검색 1 SLOW / SEARCH (22 / 33) 를누릅니다. 느린검색의경우 PAUSE ( 8 ) 를눌러재생을일시정지한다음 SLOW / SEARCH (22 / 33) 를누릅니다. 2 검색하는중에원하는속도를선택하려면 SLOW / SEARCH (22 / 33) 를반복해서누릅니다. 3 일반재생을재개하려면 PLAY ( 3) 를누릅니다. 참고 WMA, DTS-CD 및 JPEG 에는검색기능 ( 역방향, 정방향및느린재생 ) 을사용할수없습니다. MP3 에는느린재생을사용할수없습니다. VCD, SVCD 및 DivX 에는느린역방향재생을사용할수없습니다. 반복재생 단일트랙 / 챕터, 단일타이틀 / 그룹또는전체디스크를반복할수있습니다. 또한두지점 ( 시작및종료지점 ) 을설정하여특정구간을반복할수도있습니다. CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH REPEAT A B REPEAT A-B MP3, WMA, JPEG, DivX Chapter: 현재챕터를반복합니다 Title: 현재타이틀을반복합니다 Track: 현재트랙을반복합니다 Group: 현재그룹을반복합니다 Folder: 현재폴더를반복합니다 All*: 전체디스크를반복합니다 OFF: 반복모드에서나갑니다 *: 이기능은일부디스크에서사용하지못할수도있습니다. 참고 Track OFF Folder VCD 및 SVCD 의경우 PBC 모드를선택하면반복재생을사용할수없습니다. 구간반복 (DVD 오디오 /MP3/WMA/JPEG 제외 ) 1 재생중에원하는시작지점에서 A-B 를누릅니다. All 2 원하는종료지점에서 A-B 를다시누릅니다. 선택한구간이연속적으로재생됩니다. 3 해당시퀀스에서나가려면 A-B 를누릅니다. 한국어 반복재생 REPEAT 를눌러반복재생모드를선택합니다. 버튼을누를때마다 TV 화면의디스플레이는다음과같이변경됩니다. DVD 비디오 Chapter OFF Title 무작위재생 (DVD/SA-CD 제외 ) 무작위순서로트랙을재생할수있습니다. PROG RANDOM REPEAT RANDOM DVD 오디오 Track OFF CD, SA-CD, VCD, SVCD Track OFF Group All 1 재생도중 RANDOM 을누릅니다. 전면패널디스플레이에 RANDOM 이나타나고모든트랙이무작위순서로재생됩니다. 2 일반재생을재개하려면 RANDOM 을다시누릅니다. 19 Ko

112 디스크조작 프로그램재생 (CD) 디스크에저장된트랙의재생순서를사용자정의할수있습니다. 본기기에서는최대 20 개의프로그래밍된트랙을지원합니다. 숫자키패드 (0~9) CLEAR STOP ( ) GROUP CLEAR SETUP STOP TOP MENU PAGE PAUSE SKIP SLOW SEARCH ON SCREEN MULTI 2CH PROG RANDOM REPEAT A B PLAY PROG 디스크메뉴조작 (DVD/VCD/SVCD) 다수의 DVD, 비디오 CD( 버전 2.0 전용 ) 및 SVCD 디스크에는 DVD 메뉴 및 비디오 CD 재생콘트롤메뉴 라고하는오리지널네비게이션메뉴가있습니다. 이러한메뉴를사용하여디스크를간편하게조작할수있습니다. 숫자키패드 (0~9) GROUP CLEAR SETUP STOP PAGE PAUSE SLOW SEARCH MULTI 2CH PROG RANDOM REPEAT A B PLAY / / / SKIP SKIP ( / ) MENU RETURN RETURN TOP MENU ON SCREEN 1 필요하면 STOP ( 7 ) 을눌러재생을멈춥 니다. 2 PROG 를누릅니다. TV 화면에프로그램설정메뉴가나타납 니다. 3 숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여프로그램재 생으로저장하려는트랙번호를입력합 니다. 4 를눌러다음필드로커서를이동합니다. 5 원하는모든트랙을저장할때까지 3~4단계 를반복합니다. 6 / / / 를사용하여 [Play Program] 을선택한다음 를눌러 프로그램재생을시작합니다. 선택한트랙번호를지우려면 CLEAR 를누릅니다. MENU MENU DVD 메뉴사용 1 MENU 를누릅니다. TV 화면에 DVD 메뉴가나타납니다. 디스크에따라디스크를넣으면 DVD 메뉴가나타납니다. 2 / / / 또는숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여재생기능또는항목을선택합니다. 3 를눌러재생을시작합니다. 메뉴에서나가려면 MENU 를누릅니다. RETURN / / / RETURN 목록을지우려면 / / / 를사용하여 [Clear All] 을선택한다음 를누릅니다. 참고디스크트레이에서디스크를꺼내거나본기기전원을끄면저장된프로그램재생내용이지워집니다. 20 Ko

113 디스크조작 비디오 CD 재생콘트롤 (PBC) 메뉴사용 (VCD/SVCD) 1 MENU 를눌러 PBC 기능을켭니다. TV 화면에디스크메뉴가나타납니다. 디스크에따라디스크를넣으면디스크메뉴가나타납니다. 2 SKIP (l22 / 33l) 또는숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여재생옵션을선택합니다. 3 재생중에메뉴화면으로되돌아가려면 RETURN 을누릅니다. 인덱스메뉴를건너뛰고시작지점에서바로디스크를재생하려면 MENU 를눌러 PBC 기능을끕니다. y 또한설정메뉴를사용하여재생콘트롤 (PBC) 기능을켜거나끌수있습니다 (38 페이지의 PBC ( 재생컨트롤 ) 기능선택 를참조하십시오 ). OSD 메뉴사용 (DVD/VCD/SVCD/CD) 재생도중 ON SCREEN 을누릅니다. TV 화면에사용할수있는디스크정보목록이나타납니다. DVD 비디오 1 0 DVD VIDEO 00 : 00 : 10 Title 1 / 1 Audio 1 / 1 DVD 오디오 02 : 15 : 30 Chapter 1 / 7 Time 00 : 00 : 10 MPEG 5.1 Ch Subtitle 1 / 1 Bitrate Mbps Angle 1 / DVD AUDIO 00 : 00 : : 15 : 30 한국어 온스크린디스플레이 (OSD) 메뉴 (DVD/VCD/SVCD/SA-CD) OSD 메뉴에디스크재생정보 ( 예 : 타이틀, 챕터번호, 경과한재생시간또는오디오 / 자막언어 ) 가표시됩니다. 디스크재생을중단하지않고여러조작이가능합니다. Group 1 / 1 Track 1 / 8 Time 00 : 00 : 10 Audio 1 / 1 MLP 5.1 Ch 96 k / 24 bit Subtitle 1 / 1 Angle 1 / 1 Page 1 / q VCD/SVCD/CD 2 w VCD GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH Track 1 / 7 00 : 00 : 10 PROG Time Track Elapsed 숫자키패드 (0~9) RANDOM REPEAT A B e CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH STOP PAUSE PLAY SKIP TOP MENU ON SCREEN MENU RETURN ON SCREEN / / / 1: 현재타이틀또는그룹번호 / 총타이틀또는그룹수 2: 현재챕터또는트랙번호 / 총챕터또는트랙수 3: 경과시간 4: 남은시간 5: 경과시간 ( 시간검색을위해숫자를입력할수있음 ) 6: 오디오정보 7: 현재앵글번호 / 사용가능한총앵글수 8: 현재자막번호 / 사용가능한총자막언어수 9: 데이터전송속도 0: 현재오디오번호 / 사용가능한총오디오언어수 q: 현재페이지번호 / 총페이지수 w: 시간 ( 시간카테고리를선택할수있습니다.) e: w 에표시되는시간카테고리 21 Ko

114 디스크조작 타이틀 (DVD 비디오 )/ 그룹을선택하려면 (DVD 오디오 ) 1 / / / 를반복해서눌러 1 을강조한다음숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여타이틀 / 그룹번호를입력합니다. 2 를누릅니다. 챕터 (DVD 비디오 )/ 트랙을선택하려면 (VCD/SVCD/DVD 오디오 ) 1 / / / 를반복해서눌러 2 를강조한다음숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여챕터또는트랙번호를입력합니다. 2 를누릅니다. 시간을검색하려면 1 / / / 를반복해서눌러 5 를강조한다음숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여왼쪽에서오른쪽으로시간, 분, 초를입력합니다. 2 를누릅니다. 참고 시간을검색할때현재재생중인그룹 / 트랙의전체시간을벗어난시간을입력하면금지아이콘 ( ) 이표시됩니다. 앵글 / 자막 / 오디오를선택하려면 1 / / / 를반복해서눌러 7, 8 또는 0 을강조한다음숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여오디오, 자막또는앵글을입력합니다. 2 를누릅니다. 참고 시간카테고리를선택하려면 (VCD/SVCD/CD) / / / 를반복해서눌러 w 를강조한다음 를눌러시간카테고리간에전환합니다. OSD 메뉴에서나가려면 ON SCREEN 를누릅니다. 텍스트정보표시 (SA-CD) 일부 SA-CD 디스크에는텍스트정보 ( 예 : 트랙이름, 앨범이름, 음악가이름등 ) 가포함되어있습니다. 디스크에 SA-CD 텍스트를사용할수있는경우디스크를넣으면트랙이름이자동으로 TV 화면에표시됩니다. 앨범 / 음악가이름을표시하려면 재생도중 ON SCREEN 을누릅니다. 화질설정메뉴 (DVD/VCD/SVCD) 본기기에는사용자가직접정의할수있는 10 개세트의영상컬러설정이있습니다. 영상설정조정 1 재생중에 ON SCREEN 을두번누릅니다. TV 화면에화질설정메뉴가나타납니다. 2 원하는파라미터를강조하려면 / 를누르고, 선택한파라미터를조정하려면 / 를누릅니다. 화질설정 01/09 재생중인디스크에이기능을사용할수없는경우 [Angle]/[Subtitle]/[Audio] 설정을변경할수없습니다. 밝기 Move: Adjust : 0 페이지를선택하려면 (DVD 오디오 ) 1 / / / 를반복해서눌러 q 를강조한다음숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여페이지번호를입력합니다. 2 를누릅니다. 3 ON SCREEN 을눌러설정메뉴에서나갑니다. 다음파라미터를조정할수있습니다. 밝기이값을설정하여이미지의전체밝기를조정합니다. 명암이값을설정하여이미지의밝은영역 ( 흰색레벨 ) 을조정합니다. 색조이값을설정하여이미지의색조또는상을조정합니다. 22 Ko

115 디스크조작 중역선명도이값을설정하여중간주파수이미지의선명도를조정합니다. 고역선명도이값을설정하여고주파수이미지의선명도를조정니다. 화질잡음보정이값을설정하여비디오노이즈를줄입니다. 감마이값을설정하여영상의밝기를비선형적으로조정합니다. 색농도이값을설정하여컬러의농도를조정합니다. 색농도지연이값을설정하여선명한영상을얻기위한크롬신호의사전지연을조정합니다. True Life 이값을설정하여영상세부의강도를조정합니다. 양의값은비디오소스의미세한신호를재생할수있게합니다. 이기능은프로그레시브스캔 ( 콤포넌트비디오단자사용 ) 및 HDMI 출력에만사용할수있습니다. 영상설정의가용성은연결과설정에따라다릅니다. HDMI 프로그레시브 ( 콤포넌트 ) 인터레이스 ( 콤포넌트 ) 밝기 0 ~ +6 0 ~ +6 0 ~ +6 명암 -6 ~ +6-6 ~ +6-6 ~ +6 색조 -6 ~ +6-6 ~ +6-6 ~ +6 (S 비디오및 CVBS 전용 ) 중역선명도 사용할수없음 -6 ~ +6-6 ~ +6 고역선명도화질잡음보정감마 사용할 -6 ~ +6-6 ~ +6 수없음 0 ~ +6 0 ~ +6 0 ~ +6 사용할수없음 -6 ~ +6-6 ~ +6 색농도 -6 ~ +6-6 ~ +6-6 ~ +6 색농도 사용할 -2 ~ +2-2 ~ +2 지연 수없음 True Life 0 ~ +6 0 ~ +6 사용할수없음 화면확대 / 축소 (DVD 비디오 /VCD/SVCD/ DivX /JPEG) TV 화면에영상을확대하고확대한영상을이동할수있습니다. 1 재생중에영상크기를다르게표시하려면 ZOOM 을반복해서누릅니다 ( 줌 150%, 200%, 300% 또는 400%). 2 / / / 를눌러확대된화면을이동할수있습니다. 3 ZOOM 을반복해서눌러원래크기로되돌아갑니다. 보기앵글 (DVD 비디오 ) 디스크에여러카메라앵글로녹화한장면이있는경우서로다른앵글로화면을볼수있습니다. 참고 MENU TOP MENU ON SCREEN SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM RETURN / / / ZOOM ANGLE 각디스크마다사용할수있는보기앵글은다를수있습니다. DVD 메뉴또는 DVD 재킷의조작지침을참고하십시오. ANGLE 을반복해서눌러원하는앵글을선택합니다. 한국어 참고 모든영상설정은 CVBS( 컴포지트비디오 ) 및 S 비디오출력에사용할수없습니다. 23 Ko

116 디스크조작 오디오및자막언어 (DVD 비디오 /VCD) 디스크에멀티언어옵션이포함되어있는경우오디오 / 자막언어를선택할수있습니다. 참고 각디스크마다사용할수있는언어는다를수있습니다. 디스크메뉴또는디스크재킷의조작지침을참고하십시오. y 설정메뉴에서기본오디오 / 자막언어를설정할수있습니다 (17 페이지의 오디오, 자막및디스크메뉴언어설정 를참조하십시오 ). 오디오언어선택 참고 SUBTITLE AUDIO SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM AUDIO 를반복해서눌러오디오언어를선택합니다. VCD 의경우이기능은 [ 아날로그출력 ] 설정이 [ 스테레오 ] 로설정되어있을때만사용할수있습니다 (31 페이지의 아날로그출력설정 를참조하십시오 ). 자막언어선택 (DVD 비디오 ) SUBTITLE 을반복해서눌러자막언어를선택합니다. DivX 외부자막파일 DivX 외부자막파일의경우아래에나열된폰트설정을사용할수있습니다. 원하는글꼴세트로 DivX 디스크를감상하려면설정메뉴의기본자막언어설정값을원하는언어로설정합니다 (17 페이지의 오디오, 자막및디스크메뉴언어설정 를참조하십시오 ). 본기기에서는다음언어를지원합니다. 알바니아어, 브르타뉴어, 불가리아어, 벨로루시어, 카탈로니아어, 크로아티아어, 체코어, 덴마크어, 네덜란드어, 영어, 페로어, 핀란드어, 프랑스어, 독일어, 헝가리어, 아이슬란드어, 아일랜드어, 이탈리아어, 쿠르드어 ( 라틴 ), 마케도니아어, 그리스어, 히브리어, 몰디브어, 노르웨이어, 폴란드어, 포르투갈어, 루마니아어, 러시아어, 세르비아어, 슬로바키아어, 슬로베니아어, 스페인어, 스웨덴어, 터키어, 우크라이나어 참고 디스크특성및기록조건에따라일부디스크를재생할수없습니다. 일부외부자막파일은올바르게표시되지않거나전혀표시되지않을수있습니다. 외부자막파일의경우다음과같은파일이름확장자를가진자막형식이지원됩니다. ( 이러한파일은디스크탐색메뉴에는표시되지않습니다.).srt,.sub,.ssa,.smi,.ass,.txt,.psb,.sami 영화파일의파일이름은외부자막파일의파일이름과같아야합니다. 동영상파일의경우하나의외부자막파일만로드될수있습니다. 페이지변경 (DVD 오디오 ) 다수의 DVD 오디오디스크에는슬라이드쇼및페이지회전기능이포함되어있습니다. 디스크에기능을사용할수있는경우사진갤러리, 음악가소개, 가사등에대한정보페이지를표시할수있습니다. PAGE (+/-) 를반복해서눌러다음 / 이전페이지로이동합니다. DIMMER HDMI AUDIO DIRECT STANDBY GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH PAGE (+/ ) PROG 24 Ko

117 디스크조작 그룹 / 파일선택 (DVD 오디오 /DivX /MP3/ WMA/Kodak 사진 CD) 특정그룹에서트랙을선택하거나 (DVD 오디오디스크의경우 ) 폴더에서트랙 / 파일을선택할수있습니다 ( 데이터디스크의경우 ). GROUP GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH PROG 보너스그룹재생 (DVD 오디오 ) 일부 DVD 오디오디스크에는접근을위해 4 자리비밀번호가필요한보너스그룹이포함되어있습니다. 이런경우자세한정보는디스크재킷및기타포장을참고하십시오. GROUP GROUP PAGE MULTI 2CH PROG 숫자키패드 (0~9) CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH RANDOM REPEAT A B 숫자키패드 (0~9) CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH RANDOM REPEAT A B 한국어 STOP PAUSE PLAY STOP PAUSE PLAY SKIP SKIP TOP MENU ON SCREEN TOP MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN MENU RETURN / MENU RETURN / 그룹선택 (DVD 오디오 ) 1 GROUP 를누릅니다. TV 화면에그룹아이콘이나타납니다. 1 GROUP 를누릅니다. TV 화면에그룹아이콘이나타납니다. DVD AUDIO Group 01 / 08 DVD AUDIO Move: Select: Enter Group Move: 01 / 08 Select: Enter 2 / 또는숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여그룹번호를선택합니다. 3 를누릅니다. 폴더안의파일선택 (DivX /MP3/WMA/Kodak 사진 CD) 1 / 를눌러폴더를선택한다음 를눌러폴더를엽니다. 2 / 를눌러파일을선택한다음 를누릅니다. 선택한파일부터재생이시작됩니다. 숫자버튼 (0~9) 를사용하여파일을선택한경우, 선택한파일부터자동으로재생이시작됩니다. 2 / 또는숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여보너스그룹번호를선택한다음 를누릅니다. 3 숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여 4 자리비밀번호를입력한다음 를누릅니다. 4 / 를눌러트랙을선택한다음 를누릅니다. 재생영역및레이어변경 (SA-CD) SA-CD 디스크유형은단일레이어, 듀얼레이어, 하이브리드등세가지가있습니다. 각형식에는고품질스테레오영역및고품질멀티채널영역등최대 2 가지기록정보영역이있습니다. SA-CD 멀티채널과 SA-CD 스테레오영역간에전환할수있습니다. y 설정메뉴를사용하여아날로그출력설정을변경할수도있습니다 (31 페이지의 아날로그출력설정 를참조하십시오 ). 25 Ko

118 디스크 조작 GROUP MULTI 2CH PAGE Media Player MULTI /2CH Time 00 : 00 : 10 PROG ROOT RANDOM SCRNE JPEG REPEAT A B CLEAR SETUP SLOW SEARCH STOP STOP (.. 0 JPG A_0510 JPG B_0618 JPG B_0630 JPG C_ JPG C_ PLAY PAUSE ) Move : 1 재생을 정지하려면 STOP ( 7 ) 을 누릅니다. 2 2 MULTI / 2CH 를 누릅니다. / 를 눌러 폴더를 선택한 다음 를 눌러 폴더를 엽니다. 멀티 채널 영역을 선택하면 MULTI 표시등이 점등됩니다. 3 멀티미디어 파일 재생 (MP3/WMA/DivX /JPEG) 디스크 특성 또는 기록 조건에 따라 일부 파일은 제대로 재생할 수 없습니다. 본 기기는 2848x2136 픽셀 크기의 JPEG 파일을 지원 합니다. 그러나 이미지의 가로세로 비에 따라 일부 파일 이 올바르게 표시되지 않을 수도 있습니다. 상위 폴더로 이동하려면 디스크 재생이 중지 되었을 때 두 개의 점이 있는 폴더 아이콘을 선택합니다. / 를 눌러 파일을 선택한 다음 를 누릅니다. 선택한 파일부터 재생이 시작됩니다. 숫자 버튼 (0~9) 를 사용하여 파일을 선택한 경우, 선택한 파일부터 자동으로 재생이 시작 됩니다. 개인적으로 저장한 CD-R/RW 디스크 또는 상용 CD 의 MP3, WMA, DivX 및 JPEG 파일을 재생할 수 있습니다. 참고 Select : Enter 섬네일 화면 표시 (JPEG) 1 재생 중에 MENU 를 누릅니다. TV 화면에 섬네일 영상이 나타납니다. y 각 슬라이드 쇼 이미지의 지속 시간을 설정할 수 있습니다 (38 페 이지의 슬라이드 쇼의 지속 기간 설정 를 참조하십시오 ). PROG 숫자 키패드 (0~9) RANDOM REPEAT A B CLEAR SETUP STOP ( 2 SKIP (l22 / 33l) 을 눌러 이전 / 다음 페이지 SLOW SEARCH STOP PAUSE 의 나머지 영상을 표시합니다. PLAY ) 3 SKIP TOP MENU SKIP ( / ) / / / 를 눌러 영상 중 하나를 강 조한 다음 를 눌러 재생을 시작합 니다. ON SCREEN 4 데이터 디스크 메뉴로 되돌아가려면 STOP / / MENU / MENU 1 디스크 트레이에 디스크를 넣습니다. 자동으로 재생이 시작됩니다. MP3 및 WMA 의 경우 TV 화면에 데이터 디 스크 메뉴가 나타납니다. DivX 및 JPEG 의 경우 재생 중에 데이터 디스 크 메뉴를 표시하려면 STOP ( 7 )을 누릅니다. 26 Ko ( 7 ) 을 누릅니다. RETURN 영상 회전 (JPEG) 재생 중에 TV 화면의 영상을 회전하려면 / / / 를 누릅니다. : 영상을 시계 반대 방향으로 90 도 회전합 니다. : 영상을 시계 방향으로 90 도 회전합니다., : 영상을 180 도 회전합니다.

119 설정메뉴 설정메뉴 메뉴개요 y 각파라미터의초기설정은굵게표시되어있습니다. 부적당한설정을한경우언제라도모든옵션과개인설정을초기공장설정으로재설정할수있습니다. 자세한내용은 30 페이지의 시스템재설정 를참조하십시오. 메인메뉴메뉴항목항목 / 하위메뉴설정항목 / 파라미터설정 GENERAL DVD- 오디오모드 DVD- 오디오, DVD- 비디오 SA-CD 모드 화면표시언어 SA-CD, CD 아시아모델 : English, 한국모델 : English, 한국어 시청등급 ( 비밀번호입력 ) 등급 1 ~ 등급 8 시청등급비밀번호 ( 비밀번호입력 ) 새비밀번호입력, 비밀번호확인 화면보호기 자동전원끄기 취침예약 켜짐, 꺼짐 모드 1, 모드 2, 꺼짐 꺼짐, 30 분, 60 분, 90 분,120 분,150 분 공장초기화 ( 비밀번호입력 ) 예, 아니오 DivX 등록번호 (DivX 등록코드가표시됩니다 ) Enter AUDIO 아날로그출력스테레오, 멀티채널 디지털출력 LPCM 출력 한밤중청취모드 자동, PCM, 꺼짐 48KHz, 96KHz 켜짐, 꺼짐 SPEAKER 크기설정전방스피커 (L/R) 큰스피커, 작은스피커 중앙스피커 (C), 후방스피커 (SL/SR) 서브우퍼 초기화 큰스피커, 작은스피커, 꺼짐 켜짐, 꺼짐 켜짐, 꺼짐 거리설정단위피트, 미터 음량설정 전방스피커 (L/R), 중앙스피커 (C), 후방스피커 (SL/SR) 초기화전방스피커 (L), 중앙스피커 (C), 전방스피커 (R), 후방스피커 (SL), 후방스피커 (SR), 서브우퍼테스트톤초기화 0.3m~12.0m (1ft~40ft) 기본설정 : 3.0m (10ft) 켜짐, 꺼짐 0dB ~ -12dB 꺼짐, 수동, 자동 켜짐, 꺼짐 SA-CD SA-CD 설정 설정 1, 설정 2, 설정 3 CUT-OFF 주파수 60, 80, 100, 120 VIDEO 화면모드 16:9, 4:3 Pan Scan, 4:3 Letter Box TV 방식 아시아모델 : 멀티, NTSC, PAL 한국모델 : 멀티, NTSC, PAL 와이드화면크기화색범위조정 ( 미국및캐나다모델전용 ) 캡션 ( 자막 )( 미국및캐나다모델전용 ) 정지화면모드컴포넌트출력 Scart 화면출력 ( 영국, 유럽및러시아모델전용 ) NL Stretch, Pillar Box, 꺼짐켜짐, 꺼짐 켜짐, 꺼짐 프레임, 필드프로그래시브, 인터레이스드 CVBS, RGB 한국어 HDMI HDMI 해상도 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 자동 DVI 출력범위 표준, 확장 HDMI 오디오 자동, PCM, 꺼짐 DISC 음성언어 꺼짐 ([ 자막언어 ] 전용 ), 영어, 프랑스어, 스페인 자막언어 DVD 메뉴언어앵글표시 어, 일본어, 독일어, 이탈리아어, 러시아어, 기타켜짐, 꺼짐 디스크메뉴 켜짐, 꺼짐 표시시간 2 초 ~ 10 초, 기본설정 : 3초 27 Ko

120 설정메뉴 설정메뉴조작 설정은 TV 화면에서수행되어본기기를특정한요구사항에맞게사용자정의할수있습니다. 아래절차에따라설정메뉴조작을시작합니다. CLEAR REPEAT A B 2 / 를눌러원하는메인메뉴를선택한다음 를누릅니다. 메인메뉴및설정항목이나타납니다. 스피커설정 크기설정거리설정음량설정 SA-CD 1/1 SETUP SETUP STOP SLOW SEARCH PAUSE PLAY SKIP Move: Return Select: Enter / / / MENU TOP MENU ON SCREEN RETURN RETURN 3 / 를눌러원하는메뉴항목을강조합니다. 선택한메뉴항목에하위메뉴가있는경우설정항목옆에오른쪽화살표만표시됩니다. 이런경우를누른다음 3 단계를반복합니다. SUBTITLE AUDIO ANGLE ZOOM 스피커설정 1/1 SA-CD 설정 CUT-OFF 주파수 설정 y RETURN 을눌러이전메뉴를표시합니다. SETUP 을눌러설정메뉴에서나갑니다. 특정조작이요구되는메뉴에대한자세한내용은다음페이지를참고하십시오. 1 SETUP 를누릅니다. TV 에메인메뉴및메뉴항목이나타납니다. 설정 GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER VIDEO HDMI DISC DVD- 오디오모드 SA-CD 모드화면표시언어시청등급시청등급비밀번호화면보호기자동전원끄기취침예약 1/2 Move: Return Select: Enter 선택한메뉴항목에설정항목만있는경우에는설정항목양옆에왼쪽및오른쪽화살표가나타납니다. 오디오설정 아날로그출력디지털출력 LPCM 출력한밤중청취모드 스테레오 PCM 96KHz 꺼짐 1/1 Move: Return Select: Enter Move: Return Select: Enter 4 / 를눌러설정항목을전환하거나파라미터를조정합니다. 28 Ko

121 설정메뉴 일반설정메뉴 참고 DVD 오디오모드선택 일부 DVD 오디오디스크에는 DVD 오디오내용과함께 DVD 비디오내용이포함되어있습니다. DVD 오디오또는 DVD 비디오모드를선택할수있습니다. [GENERAL] 메뉴의 [DVD-오디오모드 ] 을선택합니다. DVD- 오디오 DVD 오디오및 DVD 비디오내용을모두재생할때선택합니다. 디스크에따라 DVD 오디오내용만재생될수있습니다. DVD- 비디오 DVD 비디오내용만재생할때선택합니다. 참고 설정 GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER VIDEO HDMI DISC Move: 이설정은디스크트레이에디스크가없을때만사용할수있습니다. 설정메뉴를닫으면선택한모드가적용됩니다. y DVD 오디오디스크를재생하는경우 DVD AUDIO 표시등이점등됩니다. [DVD- 비디오 ] 를선택하면 DVD AUDIO 표시등이소등됩니다. SA-CD 모드선택 DVD- 오디오모드 SA-CD 모드화면표시언어시청등급시청등급비밀번호화면보호기자동전원끄기취침예약 Return Select: Enter 일부 SA-CD 디스크에는 SA-CD 레이어와표준 CD 레이어가모두포함되어있습니다. SA-CD 또는 CD 모드를선택할수있습니다. [GENERAL] 메뉴의 [SA-CD 모드 ] 을선택합니다. SA-CD SA-CD 레이어를재생할때선택합니다. 1/2 이설정은디스크트레이에디스크가없을때만사용할수있습니다. 설정메뉴를닫으면선택한모드가적용됩니다. [CD] 를선택하면본기기는 CD 레이어가없는 SA-CD 디스크는재생하지않습니다. OSD 언어를설정합니다 이메뉴에는온스크린디스플레이 (OSD) 언어에대한다양한옵션이포함되어있습니다. 자세한내용은 17 페이지의 온스크린디스플레이 (OSD) 언어설정 을참고하십시오. 시청제한기능으로재생제한 일부 DVD 디스크의경우전체디스크또는디스크의일부장면에시청제한기능이지정되어있습니다. 이기능을사용하여재생제한레벨을설정할수있습니다. 시청레벨은 1-8 이며국가마다다릅니다. 아이에게적합하지않은디스크의재생을금지하거나특정디스크를대체장면으로재생할수도있습니다. 1 [GENERAL] 메뉴의 [ 시청등급 ] 을선택합니다. 2 숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여 4자리비밀번호를입력합니다 ( 비밀번호에대한자세한내용은아래의 비밀번호변경 참조참고 ). 비밀번호가올바르면 [ 시청등급 ] 을선택할수있습니다. 3 / 를눌러등급레벨을선택합니다. 시청제한을비활성화하여모든디스크를재생하려면 [ 등급 8] 를선택합니다. 참고 VCD, SVCD, CD 및 SA-CD 에는레벨표시가없으므로시청제한기능은이러한종류의디스크에는아무런효과가없습니다. 영화등급이디스크커버에인쇄되어있을수있지만일부 DVD 의경우등급이인코딩되어있지않습니다. 그러한디스크에는등급레벨기능이작동하지않습니다. 비밀번호변경 시청제한을위한비밀번호를변경할수있습니다. 화면에프롬프트가표시되면 4 자리비밀번호를입력합니다. 기본비밀번호는 2580 입니다. 1 [GENERAL] 메뉴의 [ 시청등급비밀번호 ] 을선택합니다. 한국어 CD CD 레이어를재생할때선택합니다. 29 Ko

122 설정메뉴 2 숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여이전 4 자리비밀번호를입력합니다. 처음이작업을수행하는경우에는 2580 을입력합니다. 비밀번호가올바르면하위메뉴가나타납니다. 3 숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여 4 자리비밀번호를새로입력합니다. [ 비밀번호확인 ] 가강조됩니다. 4 새로운 4 자리비밀번호를다시입력합니다. 이전메뉴화면이나타나고이제새로운 4 자리비밀번호가유효합니다. 화면보호기설정 화면보호기를켜거나끌수있습니다. [GENERAL] 메뉴의 [ 화면보호기 ] 을선택합니다. 켜짐 15 분이상디스크재생이중단하는경우에화면보호기를켜려면선택합니다. 꺼짐선택하여화면보호기기능을해제합니다. 자동전원기능설정 자동대기모드를설정할수있습니다. [GENERAL] 메뉴의 [ 자동전원끄기 ] 을선택합니다. 모드 1 디스크재생을 30분이상중단하거나디스크재생을다른조작없이 6시간이상계속하는경우본기기를자동으로대기모드로설정하려면선택합니다. 모드 2 디스크재생을 30 분이상중단하는경우본기기를자동으로대기모드로설정하려면선택합니다. 꺼짐자동전원해제기능을비활성화할때선택합니다. 슬립타이머설정 특정경과기간이지난후본기기를자동으로대기모드로설정할수있습니다. [GENERAL] 메뉴의 [ 취침예약 ] 을선택합니다. 30 분, 60 분, 90 분, 120 분, 150 분슬립타이머기능을설정할때선택합니다. 꺼짐슬립타이머기능을취소할때선택합니다. 시스템재설정 [ 시청등급 ] 및 [ 시청등급비밀번호 ] 를제외하고모든옵션및개인설정을공장출고시설정으로재설정할수있습니다. 1 [GENERAL] 메뉴의 [ 공장초기화 ] 을선택합니다. 2 숫자버튼 (0~9) 을사용하여 4 자리비밀번호를입력합니다. ( 비밀번호에대한자세한내용은 29 페이지의 비밀번호변경 를참조하십시오참고.) 확인화면이나타납니다. 3 / 를눌러 [ 예 ] 를선택하여시스템을재설정한다음 를누릅니다. 모든설정은공장출고시기본값으로재설정됩니다. DivX VOD 등록코드표시 야마하는 DivX VOD 서비스를사용하여비디오를빌리고구입할수있는 DivX VOD (Video On Demand) 등록코드를제공합니다. 자세한정보는 를참고하십시오. 1 [GENERAL] 메뉴의 [DivX 등록번호 ] 을선택합니다. 2 를누릅니다. 등록코드가나타납니다. 3 이전메뉴로되돌아가려면 를누릅니다. y DivX VOD 서비스 ( 에서비디오를구매하거나대여하려면이등록코드를사용하여본기기에서재생할비디오를 CD-R 에다운로드합니다. 참고 일반설정 공장초기화 DivX 등록번 Move: 공장초기화 실행할려면 [ 예 ] 를눌러주세요. 예 Return 아니오.... Select: Enter DivX VOD 에서다운로드한모든비디오는본기기에서만재생할수있습니다. DivX 영화재생중에는시간검색기능을사용할수없습니다. 2/2 30 Ko

123 설정메뉴 오디오설정메뉴 설정 GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER VIDEO HDMI DISC Move: 아날로그출력설정 아날로그출력을설정하여본기기의재생능력에맞춥니다. [AUDIO] 메뉴의 [ 아날로그출력 ] 을선택합니다. 스테레오두개의프론트스피커에서사운드만출력하는스테레오로채널출력을변경하려면이항목을선택합니다. 멀티채널 6 채널입력이있는멀티채널오디오 /( 비디오 ) 리시버를사용하는경우에선택합니다. 이모드에서본기기는 DTS 디코딩또는 Dolby Digital 5.1 채널디코딩을수행합니다 ( 해당되는경우 ). 디지털출력설정 아날로그출력디지털출력 LPCM 출력한밤중청취모드 Return Select: Enter 옵션오디오콤포넌트연결에따라디지털출력을설정합니다. [AUDIO] 메뉴의 [ 디지털출력 ] 을선택합니다. 자동디지털오디오출력단자를멀티채널디코더 / 리시버에연결한경우이항목을선택합니다. 1/1 LPCM 출력설정 디지털터미널 ( 예 : 동축또는광터미널 ) 을통해 PCM 호환리시버에본기기를연결한경우 LPCM 출력을설정합니다. 특정한샘플링레이트로디스크에기록됩니다. 샘플링레이트가높을수록음질이좋아집니다. [AUDIO] 메뉴의 [LPCM 출력 ] 을선택합니다. 48KHz 48 khz 의샘플링레이트로기록된디스크를재생하려면이항목을선택합니다. 모든 96 khz PCM 데이터스트림 ( 가능한경우 ) 은 48 khz 의샘플링레이트로변환됩니다. 96KHz 96 khz 의샘플링레이트로기록된디스크를재생하려면이항목을선택합니다. 96 khz 디스크가복제방지되어있는경우디지털출력은자동으로 48 khz 의샘플링레이트로변환됩니다. 야간감상모드설정 이모드에서높은볼륨은부드럽게출력되고낮은볼륨은청취가능한레벨로올라갑니다. 이모드는야간에남들에게방해되지않고좋아하는액션영화를감상할때유용합니다. [AUDIO] 메뉴의 [ 한밤중청취모드 ] 을선택합니다. 켜짐볼륨을고르게하려면이항목을선택합니다. 이기능은 Dolby Digital 모드의영화에만사용할수있습니다. 꺼짐서라운드사운드의풀다이나믹레인지로즐기려면이항목을선택합니다. 참고 이모드는아날로그출력에만효과가있습니다. 한국어 PCM 리시버가멀티채널오디오신호를디코딩하지못하는경우에만이항목을선택합니다. 꺼짐디지털출력을끄려면이항목을선택합니다. 31 Ko

124 설정메뉴 스피커설정메뉴 설정 GENERAL 크기설정 AUDIO 거리설정음량설정 SPEAKER SA-CD VIDEO HDMI DISC 1/1 초기화 [ 크기설정 ] 설정은공장출고시설정으로재설정할수있습니다. 1 [SPEAKER] 메뉴의 [ 크기설정 ] 에서 [ 초기화 ] 을선택합니다. 2 를누릅니다. 확인화면이나타납니다. 3 [ 예 ] 를눌러설정을재설정한다음 를누릅니다. [ 크기설정 ] 설정이공장출고시설정으로재설정됩니다. 스피커크기설정 개별스피커의크기를설정할수있습니다. [SPEAKER] 메뉴의 [ 크기설정 ] 을선택합니다. 전방스피커 (L/R) 프론트 L/R 스피커의크기를설정합니다. 큰스피커대형스피커가연결된경우에선택합니다. 작은스피커소형스피커가연결된경우에선택합니다. 중앙스피커 (C), 후방스피커 (SL/SR) 센터 / 서라운드 L/R 스피커의크기를설정합니다. 큰스피커대형스피커가연결된경우에선택합니다. 작은스피커소형스피커가연결된경우에선택합니다. 꺼짐센터 / 서라운드 L/R 스피커가연결되지않은경우에선택합니다. 서브우퍼서브우퍼활성화또는해제를선택합니다. 켜짐서브우퍼가연결된경우에선택합니다. 꺼짐서브우퍼가연결되지않은경우에선택합니다. 참고 Move: Return Select: Enter 이러한설정은 SA-CD 디스크에는사용할수없습니다. SA-CD 설정에대해서는 33 페이지의 SA-CD 구성설정 를참조하십시오하십시오. [ 중앙스피커 (C)], [ 후방스피커 (SL/SR)] 및 [ 서브우퍼 ] 설정은 [ 아날로그출력 ] 설정이 [ 스테레오 ] 로설정되어있을때는사용할수없습니다 (31 페이지의 아날로그출력설정 를참조하십시오 ). 스피커거리설정 개별스피커의거리를설정할수있습니다. 5.1 채널시스템에서스피커를배치하는가장적절한방법은서브우퍼를제외한모든스피커와감상자간의거리를동일하게유지하는것입니다. [SPEAKER] 메뉴의 [ 거리설정 ] 을선택합니다. 단위디스플레이측정단위를선택할수있습니다. 피트스피커거리를피트단위로입력할때선택합니다. 미터스피커거리를미터단위로입력할때선택합니다. 전방스피커 (L/R) 감상위치에서프론트스피커까지의거리를설정합니다. 프론트좌측스피커와우측스피커를감상위치에서동일한거리에배치하는것이좋습니다. 중앙스피커 (C) 감상위치에서센터스피커까지의거리를설정합니다. 후방스피커 (SL/SR) 감상위치에서서라운드스피커까지의거리를설정합니다. 서라운드좌측스피커와우측스피커를감상위치에서동일한거리에배치하는것이좋습니다. 조정범위 : 0.3m~12.0m (1ft~40ft) 조정단계 : 0.3m (1ft) 참고 [ 중앙스피커 (C)] 설정의경우 [ 전방스피커 (L/R)] 설정을초과한거리또는 [ 전방스피커 (L/R)] 설정 - 1.5m (5ft) 미만의거리를지정할수없습니다. [ 후방스피커 (SL/SR)] 설정의경우 [ 전방스피커 (L/R)] 설정을초과한거리또는 [ 전방스피커 (L/R)] 설정 - 4.5m (15ft) 미만의거리를지정할수없습니다. 32 Ko

125 설정메뉴 초기화 [ 거리설정 ] 설정은공장출고시설정으로재설정할수있습니다. 1 [SPEAKER] 메뉴의 [ 거리설정 ] 에서 [ 초기화 ] 을선택합니다. 2 를누릅니다. 확인화면이나타납니다. 3 [ 예 ] 를눌러설정을재설정한다음 를누릅니다. [ 거리설정 ] 설정이공장출고시설정으로재설정됩니다. 초기화 [ 음량설정 ] 설정은공장출고시설정으로재설정할수있습니다. 1 [SPEAKER] 메뉴의 [ 음량설정 ] 에서 [ 초기화 ] 을선택합니다. 2 를누릅니다. 확인화면이나타납니다. 3 [ 예 ] 를눌러설정을재설정한다음 를누릅니다. [ 음량설정 ] 설정이공장출고시설정으로재설정됩니다. 스피커레벨설정 개별스피커의볼륨레벨을설정할수있습니다. [SPEAKER] 메뉴의 [ 음량설정 ] 을선택합니다. 전방스피커 (L), 중앙스피커 (C), 전방스피커 (R), 후방스피커 (SL), 후방스피커 (SR), 서브우퍼프론트 L/R 스피커, 센터스피커, 서라운드 L/R 스피커또는서브우퍼의볼륨레벨을설정합니다. 조정범위 : 0dB ~ -12dB 조정단계 : 1dB 테스트톤각스피커의볼륨레벨을손쉽게판단할수있도록테스트톤을출력할수있습니다. 1 [SPEAKER] 메뉴의 [ 음량설정 ] 에서 [ 테스트톤 ] 을선택합니다. 2 / 를눌러 [ 꺼짐 ], [ 수동 ] 또는 [ 자동 ] 를선택합니다. 꺼짐테스트톤을출력하지않으려면선택합니다. 수동테스트톤을수동으로출력하려면선택합니다. 자동각스피커에서자동으로테스트톤을출력하려면선택합니다. 3 [ 자동 ] 의경우 / 를눌러 [ 예 ] 를선택한다음 를눌러테스트톤을출력합니다.[ 수동 ] 의경우 / 를눌러각스피커를선택한다음 를눌러테스트톤을출력합니다. SA-CD 구성설정 SA-CD 디스크에대한스피커크기및설정 / 해제상태를선택할수있습니다. 모든저주파수신호에대해차단 ( 크로스오버 ) 주파수를선택할수도있습니다. 선택한주파수미만의모든주파수는서브우퍼로전송됩니다. [SPEAKER] 메뉴의 [SA-CD] 을선택합니다. SA-CD 설정다음세가지설정중에서스피커크기및설정 / 해제상태를선택합니다. 스피커 크기또는설정 / 해제 설정 1 설정 2 설정 3 프런트 L/R 큰스피커작은스피커큰스피커 센터큰스피커작은스피커작은스피커 서라운드 L/R 큰스피커작은스피커작은스피커 서브우퍼켜짐켜짐꺼짐 CUT-OFF 주파수모든저주파수신호에대해차단 ( 크로스오버 ) 주파수를선택합니다. 선택한주파수미만의모든주파수는서브우퍼로전송됩니다. 조정범위 : 60, 80, 100, 120 (Hz) 한국어 참고 [ 아날로그출력 ] 설정이 [ 스테레오 ] 로설정되어있으면센터스피커, 서라운드스피커및서브우퍼에서테스트톤이출력되지않습니다 (31 페이지의 아날로그출력설정 를참조하십시오 ). 이설정은아날로그출력에만효과가있습니다. 33 Ko

126 설정메뉴 비디오설정메뉴 TV 의화면비가 4:3 인경우 : 설정재생디스크 TV 디스플레이 설정 GENERAL AUDIO SPEAKER VIDEO HDMI DISC Move: 화면모드 TV 방식와이드화면크기화색범위조정 *1 캡션 ( 자막 )*1 정지화면모드컴포넌트출력 Scart 화면출력 *2 TV 디스플레이설정 Return Select: Enter 본기기의화면비를 TV 에맞게설정합니다. 선택한형식은디스크에사용할수있어야합니다. [VIDEO] 메뉴의 [ 화면모드 ] 을선택합니다. 4:3 Pan Scan TV 의화면비가 4:3 인경우에선택합니다. 이설정에서는영상양측이 TV 화면에맞게잘리거나형태가조정됩니다. 4:3 Letter Box TV 의화면비가 4:3 인경우에선택합니다. 이설정에서는 TV 화면의위아래에검은색띠가있는와이드영상이표시됩니다. 16:9 와이드스크린 TV 를가지고있는경우에이항목을선택합니다. 1/1 *1:[ 화색범위조정 ] 및 [ 캡션 ( 자막 )] 은미국및캐나다모델에만사용됩니다. *2:[Scart 화면출력 ] 은영국, 유럽및러시아모델에만사용됩니다. 본기기의설정과 TV 디스플레이간관계 TV 의화면비가 16:9 인경우 ( 와이드화면 ): 설정재생디스크 TV 디스플레이 16:9 16:9 4:3 *1 4:3 Pan Scan 4:3 Letter Box *1: TV 에따라화면측면이늘어날수있습니다. 이경우, 화면크기와 TV 화면비를확인하십시오. *2: 팬스캔으로재생되도록디스크가지정되지않은경우레터박스로재생됩니다. TV 종류설정 16:9 4:3 16:9 4:3 이메뉴에는 TV 에맞는컬러시스템을선택하는옵션이포함되어있습니다. 자세한내용은 16 페이지의 3 단계 : TV 종류설정 를참조하십시오. 와이드화면형식선택 *2 화면에투영된이미지의화면비를설정합니다. 이기능은프로그레시브스캔및 HDMI 출력에만사용할수있습니다. [VIDEO] 메뉴의 [ 와이드화면크기 ] 을선택합니다. NL Stretch 비선형으로확대되는 16:9 화면에 4:3 이미지를표시할때선택합니다. ( 화면의가운데부분이좌우면보다적게확대됨.) Pillar Box 확대되지않는 16:9 화면에 4:3 이미지를표시할때선택합니다. 본기기가 16:9 스퀴즈모드로기록된디스크를재생할때도영상이화면의가운데에표시됩니다. 꺼짐화면비를조절하지않을때선택합니다. 34 Ko

LCD Display

LCD Display LCD Display SyncMaster 460DRn, 460DR VCR DVD DTV HDMI DVI to HDMI LAN USB (MDC: Multiple Display Control) PC. PC RS-232C. PC (Serial port) (Serial port) RS-232C.. > > Multiple Display

More information

DDX4038BT DDX4038BTM DDX4038 DDX4038M 2010 Kenwood Corporation All Rights Reserved. LVT A (MN)

DDX4038BT DDX4038BTM DDX4038 DDX4038M 2010 Kenwood Corporation All Rights Reserved. LVT A (MN) DDX4038BT DDX4038BTM DDX4038 DDX4038M 2010 Kenwood Corporation All Rights Reserved. LVT2201-002A (MN) 2 3 [ ] CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT 4 1 2 Language AV Input R-CAM Interrupt Panel Color Preout

More information

B _02-M_Korean.indd

B _02-M_Korean.indd DNX740BT DNX740BTM DDX704BT DDX704BTM DDX604 DDX604M B64-476-0/0 (MW) DNX740BT/DNX740BTM/DDX704BT/DDX704BTM/DDX604/DDX604M [FM] [AM] [], [] [CRSC] FM FM [SEEK] 4 DNX740BT/DNX740BTM/DDX704BT/DDX704BTM/DDX604/DDX604M

More information

2

2 2 3 4 Dolby Laboratories Macrovision Dolby Pro, Logic double-d Dolby Laboratories Macrovision Macrovision DivX, DivX Certified DivXNetworks, Inc. Windows Media 5 6 7 A-B (Cr Cb Y) (CVBS) S-Video RF MP3/WMA/JPEG

More information

. "" "",.... :...,,....,.. :..,,,..,,...,.... 2

.  ,.... :...,,....,.. :..,,,..,,...,.... 2 RD-5405 /.. . "" "",.... :...,,....,.. :..,,,..,,...,.... 2 ..,,..,.. (,,,, )......,...,., ( ),,,,.,. (, )..,...... BD/DVD CD TV, VCR,........ (+, -).,,..... 3 ... 2... 3....3... 5... 9... 10...11...11...

More information

- 이 문서는 삼성전자의 기술 자산으로 승인자만이 사용할 수 있습니다 Part Picture Description 5. R emove the memory by pushing the fixed-tap out and Remove the WLAN Antenna. 6. INS

- 이 문서는 삼성전자의 기술 자산으로 승인자만이 사용할 수 있습니다 Part Picture Description 5. R emove the memory by pushing the fixed-tap out and Remove the WLAN Antenna. 6. INS [Caution] Attention to red sentence 3-1. Disassembly and Reassembly R520/ 1 2 1 1. As shown in picture, adhere Knob to the end closely into the arrow direction(1), then push the battery up (2). 2. Picture

More information

B _02_M_Ko.indd

B _02_M_Ko.indd DNX SERIES DNX560 DNX560M DDX SERIES DDX506 DDX506M B64-467-00/0 (MW) DNX560/DNX560M/DDX506/DDX506M 4 DNX560/DNX560M/DDX506/DDX506M NAV TEL AV OUT % % % % CD () : Folder : Audio fi 5 6 DNX560/DNX560M/DDX506/DDX506M

More information

PowerChute Personal Edition v3.1.0 에이전트 사용 설명서

PowerChute Personal Edition v3.1.0 에이전트 사용 설명서 PowerChute Personal Edition v3.1.0 990-3772D-019 4/2019 Schneider Electric IT Corporation Schneider Electric IT Corporation.. Schneider Electric IT Corporation,,,.,. Schneider Electric IT Corporation..

More information

H3050(aap)

H3050(aap) USB Windows 7/ Vista 2 Windows XP English 1 2 3 4 Installation A. Headset B. Transmitter C. USB charging cable D. 3.5mm to USB audio cable - Before using the headset needs to be fully charged. -Connect

More information

Microsoft Word - HD-35 메뉴얼_0429_.doc

Microsoft Word - HD-35 메뉴얼_0429_.doc 자주 묻는 질문들...2 제품의 특장점...3 안전을 위한 주의사항...5 사용을 위한 주의사항...5 각 부분의 이름...6 HD-35 조립/분리하기...7 PC와 USB 케이블 연결하기...8 1. 윈도우 98/ME에서 설치과정...9 2. NTFS를 FAT32 포맷방식으로 바꾸기...11 설치 및 연결하기...14 1. 비디오 연결방법...14 2. 오디오

More information

차례 사용하기 전에 준비 및 연결 간편 기능 채널 관련 영상 관련 음성 관련 시간 관련 화면잔상 방지를 위한 주의사항... 4 각 부분의 이름... 6 제품의 설치방법... 10 TV를 켜려면... 15 TV를 보려면... 16 외부입력에 연결된 기기명을 설정하려면..

차례 사용하기 전에 준비 및 연결 간편 기능 채널 관련 영상 관련 음성 관련 시간 관련 화면잔상 방지를 위한 주의사항... 4 각 부분의 이름... 6 제품의 설치방법... 10 TV를 켜려면... 15 TV를 보려면... 16 외부입력에 연결된 기기명을 설정하려면.. 한 국 어 사용설명서 LED LCD MONITOR TV 사용전에 안전을 위한 주의사항을 반드시 읽고 정확하게 사용하세요. LED LCD MONITOR TV 모델 목록 M2280D M2380D 1 www.lg.com 차례 사용하기 전에 준비 및 연결 간편 기능 채널 관련 영상 관련 음성 관련 시간 관련 화면잔상 방지를 위한 주의사항... 4 각 부분의 이름...

More information

00 SPH-V6900_....

00 SPH-V6900_.... SPH-V6900 사용설명서 사용전에 안전을 위한 경고 및 주의사항을 반드시 읽고 바르게 사용해 주세요. 사용설명서의 화면과 그림은 실물과 다를 수 있습니다. 사용설명서의 내용은 휴대전화의 소프트웨어 버전 또는 KTF 사업자의 사정에 따라 다를 수 있으며, 사용자에게 통보없이 일부 변경될 수 있습니다. 휴대전화의 소프트웨어는 사용자가 최신 버전으로 업그레이드

More information

인켈(국문)pdf.pdf

인켈(국문)pdf.pdf M F - 2 5 0 Portable Digital Music Player FM PRESET STEREOMONO FM FM FM FM EQ PC Install Disc MP3/FM Program U S B P C Firmware Upgrade General Repeat Mode FM Band Sleep Time Power Off Time Resume Load

More information

2

2 2 3 4 5 8 24 8 24 9 24-26 9 9 / / 1: 11 2: FM 11 A-B 3: TV 12-14 AV OUT / 4: 14 & / 5: 15 : 15-16 26 non-usb DVD VCR ( ) USB MP3 27 17 17-18 JPEG CD 27 1: 19 JPEG 28 2: 19 3: 20-21 DivX 28 ( TV ) 4: 22

More information

歯AG-MX70P한글매뉴얼.PDF

歯AG-MX70P한글매뉴얼.PDF 120 V AC, 50/60 Hz : 52 W (with no optional accessories installed), indicates safety information. 70 W (with all optional accessories installed) : : (WxHxD) : : 41 F to 104 F (+ 5 C to + 40 C) Less than

More information

사용시 기본적인 주의사항 경고 : 전기 기구를 사용할 때는 다음의 기본적인 주의 사항을 반드시 유의하여야 합니다..제품을 사용하기 전에 반드시 사용법을 정독하십시오. 2.물과 가까운 곳, 욕실이나 부엌 그리고 수영장 같은 곳에서 제품을 사용하지 마십시오. 3.이 제품은

사용시 기본적인 주의사항 경고 : 전기 기구를 사용할 때는 다음의 기본적인 주의 사항을 반드시 유의하여야 합니다..제품을 사용하기 전에 반드시 사용법을 정독하십시오. 2.물과 가까운 곳, 욕실이나 부엌 그리고 수영장 같은 곳에서 제품을 사용하지 마십시오. 3.이 제품은 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 사용자설명서 TourBus 0 & TourBus 5 사용시 기본적인 주의사항 경고 : 전기 기구를 사용할 때는 다음의 기본적인 주의 사항을 반드시 유의하여야 합니다..제품을 사용하기 전에 반드시 사용법을 정독하십시오. 2.물과 가까운 곳, 욕실이나 부엌 그리고 수영장 같은 곳에서

More information

CD-RW_Advanced.PDF

CD-RW_Advanced.PDF HP CD-Writer Program User Guide - - Ver. 2.0 HP CD-RW Adaptec Easy CD Creator Copier, Direct CD. HP CD-RW,. Easy CD Creator 3.5C, Direct CD 3.0., HP. HP CD-RW TEAM ( 02-3270-0803 ) < > 1. CD...3 CD...5

More information

step 1-1

step 1-1 Written by Dr. In Ku Kim-Marshall STEP BY STEP Korean 1 through 15 Action Verbs Table of Contents Unit 1 The Korean Alphabet, hangeul Unit 2 Korean Sentences with 15 Action Verbs Introduction Review Exercises

More information

Page 2 of 6 Here are the rules for conjugating Whether (or not) and If when using a Descriptive Verb. The only difference here from Action Verbs is wh

Page 2 of 6 Here are the rules for conjugating Whether (or not) and If when using a Descriptive Verb. The only difference here from Action Verbs is wh Page 1 of 6 Learn Korean Ep. 13: Whether (or not) and If Let s go over how to say Whether and If. An example in English would be I don t know whether he ll be there, or I don t know if he ll be there.

More information

Page 2 of 5 아니다 means to not be, and is therefore the opposite of 이다. While English simply turns words like to be or to exist negative by adding not,

Page 2 of 5 아니다 means to not be, and is therefore the opposite of 이다. While English simply turns words like to be or to exist negative by adding not, Page 1 of 5 Learn Korean Ep. 4: To be and To exist Of course to be and to exist are different verbs, but they re often confused by beginning students when learning Korean. In English we sometimes use the

More information

untitled

untitled CLEBO PM-10S / PM-10HT Megapixel Speed Dome Camera 2/39 3/39 4/39 5/39 6/39 7/39 8/39 ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9/39 ON ON 1 2 3 4 10/39 ON ON 1 2 3 4 11/39 12/39 13/39 14/39 15/39 Meg gapixel Speed Dome Camera

More information

Cover_KD-R646[U]004A_1.indd 2 2

Cover_KD-R646[U]004A_1.indd 2 2 KD-DV5606 LVT2490-001A [UP] Cover_KD-R646[U]004A_1.indd 2 2 3 1 4 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 * 1 * 2 * 3 * 1 * 2 * 3 5 1 FM/AM DISC/USB 2 3 FM=AM* 1 =DISC* 2 =USB* 2 =AUX IN* 1 = 4 DISC/USB 5 * 3 FM/AM DISC/USB

More information

10X56_NWG_KOR.indd

10X56_NWG_KOR.indd 디지털 프로젝터 X56 네트워크 가이드 이 제품을 구입해 주셔서 감사합니다. 본 설명서는 네트워크 기능 만을 설명하기 위한 것입니다. 본 제품을 올바르게 사 용하려면 이 취급절명저와 본 제품의 다른 취급절명저를 참조하시기 바랍니다. 중요한 주의사항 이 제품을 사용하기 전에 먼저 이 제품에 대한 모든 설명서를 잘 읽어 보십시오. 읽은 뒤에는 나중에 필요할 때

More information

untitled

untitled Huvitz Digital Microscope HDS-5800 Dimensions unit : mm Huvitz Digital Microscope HDS-5800 HDS-MC HDS-SS50 HDS-TS50 SUPERIORITY Smart Optical Solutions for You! Huvitz Digital Microscope HDS-5800 Contents

More information

0922 Monitor22...._kor_1

0922 Monitor22...._kor_1 본 사용설명서는 사용자가 언제라도 볼 수 있는 장소에 보관하십시오. TV튜너의 내장으로, 모니터 기능외에 TV로도 사용할 수 있는 모니터입니다. 좁은 공간도 효율적으로 이용할 수 있는 Slim하고 Simple한 디자인. 인체공학적인 디자인으로 사용 편리성 제고. 와이드형 TFT LCD 패널의 채용으로 넓은 화면의 구현. 최대 해상도 680 x 050(WSXGA+)지원.

More information

TViX_Kor.doc

TViX_Kor.doc FF PLAY MENU STOP OK REW STEREO LEFT COAXIAL AUDIO POWER COMPOSITE COMPONENT Pb S-VIDEO COMPONENT Pr USB PORT COMPONENT Y OPTICAL AUDIO STEREO RIGHT POWER LED HDD LED TViX PLAY REMOTE RECEIVER POWER ON

More information

P/N: (Dec. 2003)

P/N: (Dec. 2003) P/N: 5615 1451 0014 (Dec. 2003) iii 1... 1...1...1...2...3...4...4...5...6...6...7...8...8...8...9...11...11...11 2... 13...13...14...14...15...16...17...18 ... 19... 20... 20... 22... 22... 24 3 Pocket

More information

2 3

2 3 Micro Hi-Fi System MCM720 2 3 AC 5 14 5 14 MW MP3 5 14 MP3 5 14 FM CD 15 ISO9660, Joliet, Multisession 15 15 6-7 MP3 VBR non- 16 MP3 7 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz 16-17 non- 32, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256 (Kbps)

More information

¹Ìµå¹Ì3Â÷Àμâ

¹Ìµå¹Ì3Â÷Àμâ MIDME LOGISTICS Trusted Solutions for 02 CEO MESSAGE MIDME LOGISTICS CO., LTD. 01 Ceo Message We, MIDME LOGISTICS CO., LTD. has established to create aduance logistics service. Try to give confidence to

More information

iAUDIO5_K .indd

iAUDIO5_K .indd 사 용 설 명 서 ver. 1.1 K 2 일반 iaudio는 거원시스템의 등록상표 입니다. 본 제품은 가정용으로서 영업목적으로 이용하실 수 없습니다. 본 설명서는 거원시스템이 모든 저작권을 가지고 있으며 본 설명서의 부분 또는 전부를 무단 배포하는 것은 허용되지 않습니다. JetShell, JetAudio의 저작권은 거원시스템이 갖고 있으며 당사의 서면동의

More information

Microsoft PowerPoint - ch03ysk2012.ppt [호환 모드]

Microsoft PowerPoint - ch03ysk2012.ppt [호환 모드] 전자회로 Ch3 iode Models and Circuits 김영석 충북대학교전자정보대학 2012.3.1 Email: kimys@cbu.ac.kr k Ch3-1 Ch3 iode Models and Circuits 3.1 Ideal iode 3.2 PN Junction as a iode 3.4 Large Signal and Small-Signal Operation

More information

This page left blank intentionally

This page left blank intentionally User s Manual Manuel d utilisation Bedienungsanleitung Manual de usuario Manuale d'istruzioni Gebruiksaanwijzing Instruções do Proprietário Bruksanvisningens Руководство пользователя Regulatory models:

More information

DV4003.indd

DV4003.indd DVD 플레이어 사용 설명서 우수한 MARANTZ 제품을 구입해 주셔서 감사합 니 MARANTZ는 소비자 제품에 대한 DVD 검색에서 우선 순위를 차지하고 있으며 본 기기는 최신 기술 개발을 적용한 제품으 로서, 품질에 충분히 만족하실 것입니 성원에 감사합니 본 사용 설명서를 정독하여 제품의 올바른 조작법을 숙지 하시기를 바랍니 설명서를 읽고 난 후에는 차후에

More information

Remote UI Guide

Remote UI Guide Remote UI KOR Remote UI Remote UI PDF Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader. Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat Reader Adobe Systems Incorporated.. Canon. Remote UI GIF Adobe Systems Incorporated Photoshop. ..........................................................

More information

(Table of Contents) 2 (Specifications) 3 ~ 10 (Introduction) 11 (Storage Bins) 11 (Legs) 11 (Important Operating Requirements) 11 (Location Selection)

(Table of Contents) 2 (Specifications) 3 ~ 10 (Introduction) 11 (Storage Bins) 11 (Legs) 11 (Important Operating Requirements) 11 (Location Selection) SERVICE MANUAL (Table of Contents) 2 (Specifications) 3 ~ 10 (Introduction) 11 (Storage Bins) 11 (Legs) 11 (Important Operating Requirements) 11 (Location Selection) 12 (Storage Bins) 12 (Ice Machine)

More information

DE1-SoC Board

DE1-SoC Board 실습 1 개발환경 DE1-SoC Board Design Tools - Installation Download & Install Quartus Prime Lite Edition http://www.altera.com/ Quartus Prime (includes Nios II EDS) Nios II Embedded Design Suite (EDS) is automatically

More information

Solaris Express Developer Edition

Solaris Express Developer Edition Solaris Express Developer Edition : 2008 1 Solaris TM Express Developer Edition Solaris OS. Sun / Solaris, Java, Web 2.0,,. Developer Solaris Express Developer Edition System Requirements. 768MB. SPARC

More information

G2011WDT-Manual-LG(CCNF-Ver02).xls

G2011WDT-Manual-LG(CCNF-Ver02).xls 이 기기는 가정용으로 전자파 적합 등록을 한 기기로써 주거지역에는 물론 모든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다. 사 용 설 명 서 20.1" TFT LCD TV+Monitor Model : G2011WDT 금미전자 안전을 위한 주의사항 안전을 위한 주의사항은 제품의 안전하고 올바른 사용과 사고나 위험을 사전에 막기 위한 것이므로 반드시 지켜 주시기 바랍니다. 모니터

More information

2 min 응용 말하기 01 I set my alarm for 7. 02 It goes off. 03 It doesn t go off. 04 I sleep in. 05 I make my bed. 06 I brush my teeth. 07 I take a shower.

2 min 응용 말하기 01 I set my alarm for 7. 02 It goes off. 03 It doesn t go off. 04 I sleep in. 05 I make my bed. 06 I brush my teeth. 07 I take a shower. 스피킹 매트릭스 특별 체험판 정답 및 스크립트 30초 영어 말하기 INPUT DAY 01 p.10~12 3 min 집중 훈련 01 I * wake up * at 7. 02 I * eat * an apple. 03 I * go * to school. 04 I * put on * my shoes. 05 I * wash * my hands. 06 I * leave

More information

Contents English Setup, 4 Features and troubleshooting, 8 繁 體 中 文 安 裝, 4 功 能 說 明 和 疑 難 排 解, 21 简 体 中 文 安 装, 4 功 能 和 故 障 排 除, 34 한국어 설치, 4 기능 및 문제 해결,

Contents English Setup, 4 Features and troubleshooting, 8 繁 體 中 文 安 裝, 4 功 能 說 明 和 疑 難 排 解, 21 简 体 中 文 安 装, 4 功 能 和 故 障 排 除, 34 한국어 설치, 4 기능 및 문제 해결, Contents English Setup, 4 Features and troubleshooting, 8 繁 體 中 文 安 裝, 4 功 能 說 明 和 疑 難 排 解, 21 简 体 中 文 安 装, 4 功 能 和 故 障 排 除, 34 한국어 설치, 4 기능 및 문제 해결, 47 2 MK700 M705 3 1 4 2 Pull 繁 體 中 文 简 体 中 文 拉 出 拉

More information

MCR-840

MCR-840 CLVK MCR-840 (R-840 + DVD-840 + NS-BP300) RECEIVER/DVD PLAYER AMPLI-TUNER/LECTEUR DVD OWNER'S MANUAL MODE D'EMPLOI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures

More information

K7VT2_QIG_v3

K7VT2_QIG_v3 1......... 2 3..\ 4 5 [R] : Enter Raid setup utility 6 Press[A]keytocreateRAID RAID Type: JBOD RAID 0 RAID 1: 2 7 " RAID 0 Auto Create Manual Create: 2 RAID 0 Block Size: 16K 32K

More information

TEL:02)861-1175, FAX:02)861-1176 , REAL-TIME,, ( ) CUSTOMER. CUSTOMER REAL TIME CUSTOMER D/B RF HANDY TEMINAL RF, RF (AP-3020) : LAN-S (N-1000) : LAN (TCP/IP) RF (PPT-2740) : RF (,RF ) : (CL-201)

More information

Microsoft Word - Installation and User Manual_CMD V2.2_.doc

Microsoft Word - Installation and User Manual_CMD V2.2_.doc CARDMATIC CMD INSTALLATION MANUAL 씨앤에이씨스템(C&A SYSTEM Co., Ltd.) 본사 : 서울특별시 용산구 신계동 24-1(금양빌딩 2층) TEL. (02)718-2386( 代 ) FAX. (02) 701-2966 공장/연구소 : 경기도 고양시 일산동구 백석동 1141-2 유니테크빌 324호 TEL. (031)907-1386

More information

01KRCOV-KR

01KRCOV-KR 4-234-236-71(1) Mini Hi-Fi Component System MHC-RG60 MHC-DX30/RG40 MHC-DX20/RG30 2001 Sony Corporation 1 1 (CLASS 1 LASER), 1 (CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT MARKING) 2 4 5 CD 6 R6 (AA ) 8 8 8 CD 9 CD / / 9 CD

More information

XJ-A142_XJ-A147_XJ-A242_XJ-A247_XJ-A252_XJ-A257_XJ-M141_XJ-M146_XJ-M151_XJ-M156_XJ-M241_XJ-M246_XJ-M251_XJ-M256

XJ-A142_XJ-A147_XJ-A242_XJ-A247_XJ-A252_XJ-A257_XJ-M141_XJ-M146_XJ-M151_XJ-M156_XJ-M241_XJ-M246_XJ-M251_XJ-M256 데이터 프로젝터 XJ-A 시리즈 XJ-A142/XJ-A147* XJ-A242/XJ-A247* XJ-A252/XJ-A257* XJ-M 시리즈 XJ-M141/XJ-M146* XJ-M151/XJ-M156* XJ-M241/XJ-M246* XJ-M251/XJ-M256* *USB 모델 KO 사용설명서 본 설명서에서 XJ-A 시리즈 및 XJ-M 시리즈 는 위에 나열된 특정

More information

6. Separate HDD by pulling in the arrow direction. * Cautions Avoid lifting HDD excessively, because Connector can be damaged ODD Remove

6. Separate HDD by pulling in the arrow direction. * Cautions Avoid lifting HDD excessively, because Connector can be damaged ODD Remove 3-1. Disassembly and Reassembly R510 [Caution] Attention to red sentence. 2 2 1. Before disassembling, the AC adaptor and Battery must be separated. 2. AS mark No.1/2 put KNOB-Battery to end of each side,

More information

3000 Series Art. 3171B Digital intercoms Bus line Local bell input Alarm input Service push button Handset

3000 Series Art. 3171B Digital intercoms Bus line Local bell input Alarm input Service push button Handset Bus line 1 3 4 12 Local bell input Alarm input Service push button 2 5 9 10 8 11 1 Handset 2 Bell loudspeaker 3 Door opening push button 4 Service push button 5 Privacy -OFF (only Art. 312) Connection

More information

1. Features IR-Compact non-contact infrared thermometer measures the infrared wavelength emitted from the target spot and converts it to standard curr

1. Features IR-Compact non-contact infrared thermometer measures the infrared wavelength emitted from the target spot and converts it to standard curr Non-Contact Infrared Temperature I R - Compact Sensor / Transmitter GASDNA co.,ltd C-910C, Bupyeong Woolim Lion s Valley, #425, Cheongcheon-Dong, Bupyeong-Gu, Incheon, Korea TEL: +82-32-623-7507 FAX: +82-32-623-7510

More information

Microsoft Word - 국제중재

Microsoft Word - 국제중재 기업인과 변호사를 위한 국제 중재(International Arbitration)의 이해와 활용 법무법인 이산( 移 山 ) 서울시 서초구 서초4동 1698-2 형남빌딩 5층 전화: (02) 3477-0150 팩스: 3477-0160 http://www.esanlaw.com 들어가는 말 국제거래에서 발생할 수 있는 분쟁을

More information

Product A4

Product A4 2 APTIV Film Versatility and Performance APTIV Film Versatility and Performance 3 4 APTIV Film Versatility and Performance APTIV Film Versatility and Performance 5 PI Increasing Performance PES PPSU PSU

More information

<30353132BFCFB7E15FC7D1B1B9C1A4BAB8B9FDC7D0C8B85F31352D31BCF6C1A4C8AEC0CE2E687770>

<30353132BFCFB7E15FC7D1B1B9C1A4BAB8B9FDC7D0C8B85F31352D31BCF6C1A4C8AEC0CE2E687770> 지상파 방송의 원격송신과 공중송신권 침해여부에 관한 사례연구 Case Study on Copyright Infringement of Remote Transmission of Television Program 최정열(Choe, Jeong-Yeol) * 목 차 Ⅰ. 서론 Ⅱ. 사실 관계 및 재판의 경과 1. 원격시청기기 및 그 사용방법 등 2. 피고의 서비스 3.

More information

IM-20 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Power On Power Off 13 1 4 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2 7 28 29 30 31 3 2 Music Voice Settings Delete EQ Repeat LCD Contrast Auto OFF Rec Sample BackLight Return Normal

More information

VZ94-한글매뉴얼

VZ94-한글매뉴얼 KOREAN / KOREAN VZ9-4 #1 #2 #3 IR #4 #5 #6 #7 ( ) #8 #9 #10 #11 IR ( ) #12 #13 IR ( ) #14 ( ) #15 #16 #17 (#6) #18 HDMI #19 RGB #20 HDMI-1 #21 HDMI-2 #22 #23 #24 USB (WLAN ) #25 USB ( ) #26 USB ( ) #27

More information

2 라이선스 라이선스 돌비 래버러토리스의 허가를 얻어 제조한 제품입니다. 돌비 및 더블 D 심볼은 래버러토리스의 상표입니다. DivX 비디오에 관하여 DivX 는 Rovi Corporation 의 자회사 DivX, LLC가 개발한 디지털 비디오 포맷입니다. 본 제품은

2 라이선스 라이선스 돌비 래버러토리스의 허가를 얻어 제조한 제품입니다. 돌비 및 더블 D 심볼은 래버러토리스의 상표입니다. DivX 비디오에 관하여 DivX 는 Rovi Corporation 의 자회사 DivX, LLC가 개발한 디지털 비디오 포맷입니다. 본 제품은 사용설명서 DLP PROJECTOR 사용전에 안전을 위한 주의사항을 반드시 읽고 정확하게 사용하세요. PH250 *MFL68162401* www.lge.co.kr P/NO : MFL68162401 (1502-REV05) 2 라이선스 라이선스 돌비 래버러토리스의 허가를 얻어 제조한 제품입니다. 돌비 및 더블 D 심볼은 래버러토리스의 상표입니다. DivX 비디오에

More information

Logitech Surround Sound Speaker System Z906 Contents English 3 繁 體 中 文 14 한국어 25 2

Logitech Surround Sound Speaker System Z906 Contents English 3 繁 體 中 文 14 한국어 25 2 Logitech Surround Sound Speaker System Z906 User s Guide Model: S-00102 (110V ~ ) S-00103 (220V ~ ) Logitech Surround Sound Speaker System Z906 Contents English 3 繁 體 中 文 14 한국어 25 2 Logitech Surround

More information

비어 있음

비어 있음 VYPYR. VYPYR 15 VYPYR 120,. 43 Peavey. VYPYR., " ". TransTube " ", 266MHz SHARC. VYPYR 5,.,,. VYPYR. AC. IEC ( )... : 24 "( 30cm). 0 - Input. 1 - Stompbox Encoder VYPYR15.. 11.!. 2 - Amp Encoder.. 2. LED

More information

(specifications) 3 ~ 10 (introduction) 11 (storage bin) 11 (legs) 11 (important operating requirements) 11 (location selection) 12 (storage bin) 12 (i

(specifications) 3 ~ 10 (introduction) 11 (storage bin) 11 (legs) 11 (important operating requirements) 11 (location selection) 12 (storage bin) 12 (i SERVICE MANUAL N200M / N300M / N500M ( : R22) e-mail : jhyun00@koreacom homepage : http://wwwicematiccokr (specifications) 3 ~ 10 (introduction) 11 (storage bin) 11 (legs) 11 (important operating requirements)

More information

MHC-GX90D/RV900D/RV800D/RV600D

MHC-GX90D/RV900D/RV800D/RV600D 4-241-538-81(1) Mini Hi-Fi Component System MHC-GX90D MHC-RV900D MHC-RV800D MHC-RV600D 2002 Sony Corporation 2 KR 3 KR 4 KR 5 KR ALL X MODEL NO. HCD-RVXXXX DVD DECK RECEIVER AC: 00V 00Hz 00W SERIAL NO:

More information

DWCOM15/17_manual

DWCOM15/17_manual TFT-LCD MONITOR High resolution DWCOM15/17 DIGITAL WINDOW COMMUNICATION DIGITAL WINDOW COMMUNICATION 2 2 3 5 7 7 7 6 (Class B) Microsoft, Windows and Windows NT Microsoft VESA, DPMS and DDC Video Electronic

More information

2014 HSC Korean Continuers

2014 HSC Korean Continuers Centre Number 2014 HIGHER SCHOOL CERTIFICATE EXAMINATION Student Number Korean Continuers Total marks 80 Section I Pages 2 4 General Instructions Reading time 10 minutes Working time 2 hours and 50 minutes

More information

i-movix 특징 l 안정성 l 뛰어난화질 l 차별화된편의성

i-movix 특징 l 안정성 l 뛰어난화질 l 차별화된편의성 i-movix 소개 2005 년설립 ( 벨기에, 몽스 ), 방송카메라제작 2005년 Sprintcam Live System 개발 2007년 Sprintcam Live V2 2009년 Sprintcam Live V3 HD 2009년 Sprintcam Vvs HD 2011년 Super Slow Motion X10 2013년 Extreme + Super Slow

More information

00_표지.indd

00_표지.indd 휴대전화를 잘못 사용하여 사용자가 부상을 입거나 휴대전화가 손상되는 경우 휴대전화의 전자파 관련 정보를 알아두세요. 휴대전화는 전원이 켜진 상태에서 고주파 에너지 (RF파 에너지)를 송수신합니다. 정보통신부는 이 에너지가 인체에 미치는 영향에 대한 안전 기준을 입법하여 시행하고 있습니다. 이 휴대전화는 그 기준에 맞게 만들어졌습니다. 휴대용 액세서리는 삼성에서

More information

#KM-235(110222)

#KM-235(110222) PARTS BOOK KM-235A/B INFORMATION A. Parts Book Structure of Part Book Unique code by mechanism Unique name by mechanism Explode view Ref. No. : Unique identifcation number by part Parts No. : Unique Product

More information

Coriolis.hwp

Coriolis.hwp MCM Series 주요특징 MaxiFlo TM (맥시플로) 코리올리스 (Coriolis) 질량유량계 MCM 시리즈는 최고의 정밀도를 자랑하며 슬러리를 포함한 액체, 혼합 액체등의 질량 유량, 밀도, 온도, 보정된 부피 유량을 측정할 수 있는 질량 유량계 이다. 단일 액체 또는 2가지 혼합액체를 측정할 수 있으며, 강한 노이즈 에도 견디는 면역성, 높은 정밀도,

More information

airDACManualOnline_Kor.key

airDACManualOnline_Kor.key 5F InnoValley E Bldg., 255 Pangyo-ro, Bundang-gu, Seongnam-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea (Zip 463-400) T 031 8018 7333 F 031 8018 7330 airdac AD200 F1/F2/F3 141x141x35 mm (xx) 350 g LED LED1/LED2/LED3 USB RCA

More information

ORANGE FOR ORACLE V4.0 INSTALLATION GUIDE (Online Upgrade) ORANGE CONFIGURATION ADMIN O

ORANGE FOR ORACLE V4.0 INSTALLATION GUIDE (Online Upgrade) ORANGE CONFIGURATION ADMIN O Orange for ORACLE V4.0 Installation Guide ORANGE FOR ORACLE V4.0 INSTALLATION GUIDE...1 1....2 1.1...2 1.2...2 1.2.1...2 1.2.2 (Online Upgrade)...11 1.3 ORANGE CONFIGURATION ADMIN...12 1.3.1 Orange Configuration

More information

APOGEE Insight_KR_Base_3P11

APOGEE Insight_KR_Base_3P11 Technical Specification Sheet Document No. 149-332P25 September, 2010 Insight 3.11 Base Workstation 그림 1. Insight Base 메인메뉴 Insight Base Insight Insight Base, Insight Base Insight Base Insight Windows

More information

<32B1B3BDC32E687770>

<32B1B3BDC32E687770> 008년도 상반기 제회 한 국 어 능 력 시 험 The th Test of Proficiency in Korean 일반 한국어(S-TOPIK 중급(Intermediate A 교시 이해 ( 듣기, 읽기 수험번호(Registration No. 이 름 (Name 한국어(Korean 영 어(English 유 의 사 항 Information. 시험 시작 지시가 있을

More information

B64-4102-00_00_KO.indb

B64-4102-00_00_KO.indb DDX80BT DDX80BTM B6-0-00/00 (MW) DDX80BT/DDX80BTM DDX80BT/DDX80BTM 5 6 DDX80BT/DDX80BTM % % % % 7 CD () : Folder : Audio fi 8 DDX80BT/DDX80BTM 9 5 5 6 ALL 8 9 6:9 LB E D C B A C B D E 0 DDX80BT/DDX80BTM

More information

2

2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 60.27(2.37) 490.50(19.31) 256.00 (10.07) 165.00 111.38 (4.38) 9.00 (0.35) 688.00(27.08) 753.00(29.64) 51.94 (2.04) CONSOLE 24CH 32CH 40CH 48CH OVERALL WIDTH mm (inches) 1271.45(50.1)

More information

대경테크종합카탈로그

대경테크종합카탈로그 The Series Pendulum Impact 601 & 602 Analog Tester For Regular DTI-602B (Izod) DTI-601 (Charpy) DTI-602A (Izod) SPECIFICATIONS Model DTI-601 DTI-602 Type Charpy for plastics lzod for plastics Capacity

More information

DCDA100_kor.indd

DCDA100_kor.indd SACD 플레이어 사용 설명서 안전을 위한 주의사항 주의 감전 위험 열지 마십시오 주의: 감전의 위험을 줄이기 위해 커버(또는 뒤 커버)를 열거나 분해하 지 마십시오. 기기 내부에 사용자가 수리할 수 있는 부품은 없습 니다. 서비스를 받으려면 자격이 있는 서비스 직원에게 문의하 여 주십시오. 이 표시는 "위험 전압"으로 인하여 사용자에게 감전의 위험이 있음을

More information

MAGIC-6004M_K

MAGIC-6004M_K Operation Manual 2 Way Stereo Combination Amplifier MAGIC-6004M POWER OFF MAGIC-6004M 1 2 MAGIC-6004M 1 2 3 4 CD / MP3 MP3 PLAYER STOP PLAY PAUSE SCAN REPT RAND EJECT TRACK DIRECTORY F1 21 20 19 18 17

More information

72129o

72129o 유지보수정보 Third Edition Second Printing Part No 97773 Genie Industries 1 9 10 12 14 16 20 21 26 28 36 http//wwwgenieliftcom techpub@genieindcom Copyright 2000 Genie Industries 6, 2002 10 2 2, 2004 8 3 2,

More information

Copyright 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.,.,,,,,,,,,,,,.,...,. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. Oracle programs, including any oper

Copyright 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.,.,,,,,,,,,,,,.,...,. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. Oracle programs, including any oper Windows Netra Blade X3-2B( Sun Netra X6270 M3 Blade) : E37790 01 2012 9 Copyright 2012, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.,.,,,,,,,,,,,,.,...,. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. Oracle programs,

More information

MAX+plus II Getting Started - 무작정따라하기

MAX+plus II Getting Started - 무작정따라하기 무작정 따라하기 2001 10 4 / Version 20-2 0 MAX+plus II Digital, Schematic Capture MAX+plus II, IC, CPLD FPGA (Logic) ALTERA PLD FLEX10K Series EPF10K10QC208-4 MAX+plus II Project, Schematic, Design Compilation,

More information

#KLZ-371(PB)

#KLZ-371(PB) PARTS BOOK KLZ-371 INFORMATION A. Parts Book Structure of Part Book Unique code by mechanism Unique name by mechanism Explode view Ref. No. : Unique identifcation number by part Parts No. : Unique Product

More information

고객 카드 현대모비스 제품을 구입해 주셔서 대단히 감사합니다. A/S 마크란? 공업 진흥청이 애프터 서비스가 우수한 업체를 선정, 지정하는 마크로 애프터 서비스 센터 운영관리 등 8개 분야 45개 항목의 까다로운 심사로 결정됩니다. 주의 : 본 제품의 디자인 및 규격은

고객 카드 현대모비스 제품을 구입해 주셔서 대단히 감사합니다. A/S 마크란? 공업 진흥청이 애프터 서비스가 우수한 업체를 선정, 지정하는 마크로 애프터 서비스 센터 운영관리 등 8개 분야 45개 항목의 까다로운 심사로 결정됩니다. 주의 : 본 제품의 디자인 및 규격은 CAR AUDIO SYSTEM 3XKRC07 AM100MDDG 사용설명서 ATYPE 고객 카드 현대모비스 제품을 구입해 주셔서 대단히 감사합니다. A/S 마크란? 공업 진흥청이 애프터 서비스가 우수한 업체를 선정, 지정하는 마크로 애프터 서비스 센터 운영관리 등 8개 분야 45개 항목의 까다로운 심사로 결정됩니다. 주의 : 본 제품의 디자인 및 규격은 제품의

More information

AV....n17.

AV....n17. 사용설명서 HAV-962 HVC-800 HTN -100 본 사 : 경기도 이천시 부발읍 아미리 산 136-1 대표전화 : 0336) 630-4114 AV SYSTEM HYUNDAI MULTI AV SYSTEM.. VOL FM TAPE NAVI AM TV PUSH PWR VCD F1 MULTI AV SYSTEM F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 AUTO EXPOSURE..,.

More information

본문01

본문01 Ⅱ 논술 지도의 방법과 실제 2. 읽기에서 논술까지 의 개발 배경 읽기에서 논술까지 자료집 개발의 본래 목적은 초 중 고교 학교 평가에서 서술형 평가 비중이 2005 학년도 30%, 2006학년도 40%, 2007학년도 50%로 확대 되고, 2008학년도부터 대학 입시에서 논술 비중이 커지면서 논술 교육은 학교가 책임진다. 는 풍토 조성으로 공교육의 신뢰성과

More information

#KM560

#KM560 KM-560 KM-560-7 PARTS BOOK KM-560 KM-560-7 INFORMATION A. Parts Book Structure of Part Book Unique code by mechanism Unique name by mechanism Explode view Ref. No. : Unique identifcation number by part

More information

LCD Monitor

LCD Monitor LCD MONITOR quick start guide 400FP-2 460FP-2 400FPn-2 460FPn-2 ii Floor standing type) Note LCD Display MagicInfo Software CD MagicInfo Manual CD (FPn-2.) (AAA X 2) (FPn-2.) BNC to RCA (46.) D-Sub DVI

More information

저희 R7 하이파이 라디오그램을 선택해 주셔서 감사합니다. 60년대 디자인으로부터 영감을 얻은 R7은 저희가 넘치는 자신감을 가지고 출시한 상징적인 창작품입니다. 이 기기를 처음 대면할 때부터 경탄할 수 밖에 없는 멋진 외형, 그리고 놀라운 음질과 더불어, 여러분으로

저희 R7 하이파이 라디오그램을 선택해 주셔서 감사합니다. 60년대 디자인으로부터 영감을 얻은 R7은 저희가 넘치는 자신감을 가지고 출시한 상징적인 창작품입니다. 이 기기를 처음 대면할 때부터 경탄할 수 밖에 없는 멋진 외형, 그리고 놀라운 음질과 더불어, 여러분으로 사용자 가이드 KR R7 하이파이 라디오그램 사용자 가이드 저희 R7 하이파이 라디오그램을 선택해 주셔서 감사합니다. 60년대 디자인으로부터 영감을 얻은 R7은 저희가 넘치는 자신감을 가지고 출시한 상징적인 창작품입니다. 이 기기를 처음 대면할 때부터 경탄할 수 밖에 없는 멋진 외형, 그리고 놀라운 음질과 더불어, 여러분으로 하여금 음악과 라디오의 즐거움을

More information

<32382DC3BBB0A2C0E5BED6C0DA2E687770>

<32382DC3BBB0A2C0E5BED6C0DA2E687770> 논문접수일 : 2014.12.20 심사일 : 2015.01.06 게재확정일 : 2015.01.27 청각 장애자들을 위한 보급형 휴대폰 액세서리 디자인 프로토타입 개발 Development Prototype of Low-end Mobile Phone Accessory Design for Hearing-impaired Person 주저자 : 윤수인 서경대학교 예술대학

More information

Microsoft PowerPoint - XAD-400.ppt [호환 모드]

Microsoft PowerPoint - XAD-400.ppt [호환 모드] 4Ch H.264 Hardware Codec H.264 User s Manual VER 2.0 4 Channel Real-time playback / USB backup The most stable and reliable real stand alone Digital Video Multiplex Recorder 설치 및 사용시 주의사항 초기설치 및 사용시 주의사항

More information

전자교탁 사양서.hwp

전자교탁 사양서.hwp 사 양 서 품 목 단 위 수량 SYSTEM CONSOLE EA 32 - 사용자에 따른 타블렛 모니터 저소음 전동 각도 조절기능이 내장된 교탁 - 교탁 상/하부 별도의 조립이 필요 없는 일체형(All in One type) CONSOLE - 상판에 리미트 센서를 부착하여 장비 및 시스템의 안정성 강화 - 금형으로 제작, 슬림하고 견고하며 마감이 깔끔한 미래지향적

More information

*DNX_DDX7_M_KOR.indb

*DNX_DDX7_M_KOR.indb DNX70 DDX70 DDX70M B6-09-00/00 (MW) DNX70/DDX70/DDX70M DNX70/DDX70/DDX70M 5 6 DNX70/DDX70/DDX70M % % % % 7 CD () : Folder : Audio fi 8 DNX70/DDX70/DDX70M 9 5 5 6 ALL 8 9 6:9 LB E D C B A C B D E 0 DNX70/DDX70/DDX70M

More information

B64-4295-00_00_KOR.indd

B64-4295-00_00_KOR.indd KVT-54DVD KVT-54DVDM B64-495-00/00 (MW) KVT-54DVD/KVT-54DVDM 4 KVT-54DVD/KVT-54DVDM 5 6 KVT-54DVD/KVT-54DVDM % % % % 7 CD () : Folder : Audio fi 8 KVT-54DVD/KVT-54DVDM 9 4 5 4 5 6 ALL 8 9 6:9 LB A B C

More information

Microsoft PowerPoint - User Manual-100 - 20150521.pptx

Microsoft PowerPoint - User Manual-100 - 20150521.pptx CIC-100 사용 설명서 (User Manual) 나의 커뮤니티, 보는 이야기 TocView [모델명 : CIC-100] 주의사항 매뉴얼의 내용은 서비스 향상을 위하여 개별 사용자의 사전 동의 또는 별도의 공지 없이 변경될 수 있습니다. 사용자의 인터넷 환경에 따라 제품 성능 및 기능의 제작 또는 사용이 불가능할 수 있습니다. 본 제품의 이용 중 장애에 의하여

More information

DCR-HC15

DCR-HC15 3-089-848-42(1) DCR-HC15 2004 Sony Corporation 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 5 6 2 7 3 4 8 3 c 4 5 6 c 7 3 2 v 1 Z 2 3 1 2 8 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 9 10 [a] [b] [c] [d] [a] [b] [c] [d] 11 (1) (2) (1) (2) 12 (1) (2) v (3)

More information

B64_3977_0000KOR_P01_55.indd

B64_3977_0000KOR_P01_55.indd DDX50 B64-977-00/00 (MW) DDX50 4 DDX50 5 6 DDX50 % % % % 7 CD () : Folder : Audio fi 8 DDX50 9 4 5 4 5 6 ALL 8 9 6:9 LB A B C D E C B E E 0 DDX50 C 7 4 5 6 8 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 A 0 A B C D E D B DDX50 D DVD

More information

#Ȳ¿ë¼®

#Ȳ¿ë¼® http://www.kbc.go.kr/ A B yk u δ = 2u k 1 = yk u = 0. 659 2nu k = 1 k k 1 n yk k Abstract Web Repertoire and Concentration Rate : Analysing Web Traffic Data Yong - Suk Hwang (Research

More information

Slide 1

Slide 1 Clock Jitter Effect for Testing Data Converters Jin-Soo Ko Teradyne 2007. 6. 29. 1 Contents Noise Sources of Testing Converter Calculation of SNR with Clock Jitter Minimum Clock Jitter for Testing N bit

More information

` Companies need to play various roles as the network of supply chain gradually expands. Companies are required to form a supply chain with outsourcing or partnerships since a company can not

More information

T-POS mini manual_154.5x216

T-POS mini manual_154.5x216 TA-E41 ENGLISH Manual v.1 TA-E41 ENGLISH Features of TA-E41 Amplifier Accessory SAFETY Safety precaution Grounding precautions About power CONNECTION Front panel features Rear panel features Connection

More information

<313630313032C6AFC1FD28B1C7C7F5C1DF292E687770>

<313630313032C6AFC1FD28B1C7C7F5C1DF292E687770> 양성자가속기연구센터 양성자가속기 개발 및 운영현황 DOI: 10.3938/PhiT.25.001 권혁중 김한성 Development and Operational Status of the Proton Linear Accelerator at the KOMAC Hyeok-Jung KWON and Han-Sung KIM A 100-MeV proton linear accelerator

More information

3600 Series Art Digital videophone for VX2200 Digital System ON SW1 SW2 ON SW3 ON Fig. 1 Fig. 2 DE

3600 Series Art Digital videophone for VX2200 Digital System ON SW1 SW2 ON SW3 ON Fig. 1 Fig. 2 DE 161 62 46 178 218 ON SW1 SW2 ON SW3 ON 1 2 3 4 5 678 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 Fig. 1 Fig. 2 DESCRIPTION Intelligent videophone for the VX2200 digital system incorporating a 3,5 full colour active matrix LCD monitor,

More information

chapter4

chapter4 Basic Netw rk 1. ก ก ก 2. 3. ก ก 4. ก 2 1. 2. 3. 4. ก 5. ก 6. ก ก 7. ก 3 ก ก ก ก (Mainframe) ก ก ก ก (Terminal) ก ก ก ก ก ก ก ก 4 ก (Dumb Terminal) ก ก ก ก Mainframe ก CPU ก ก ก ก 5 ก ก ก ก ก ก ก ก ก ก

More information

Windows 네트워크 사용 설명서

Windows 네트워크 사용 설명서 Windows 네트워크 사용 설명서 (Wireless Manager mobile edition 5.5) 그림의 예로 사용된 프로젝터는 PT-FW300NTEA 입니다. 한국어 TQBH0205-5 (K) 목차 소프트웨어 라이센스 계약 3 무선 연결 사용 시 참고 사항 4 보안 관련 참고 사항 6 소프트웨어 요구 사항 12 시스템 요구 사항 12 Wireless

More information